第八、随念业处解说注释显示巴利原文
8. Anussatikammaṭṭhānaniddesavaṇṇanā
死随念论注释显示巴利原文
Maraṇassatikathāvaṇṇanā
167 以上为随念天。因为它在六随念中最后被解说,所以是近的,也是现前的。“无间”,是因它紧接着被解说的缘故。为首先显示死,故说“其中,死”等。虽然在此,依“老死由二蕴所摄”之说,应将诸蕴的破坏——也就是死蕴的灭尽说为死;但它在业处修行者面前特别以命根灭尽的形态显现,故说为“命根的断绝”。因此,在解说中说:“舍弃身躯,命根断绝”。其中,“属于一有的”即被一有所限定者。“命根的断绝”即命根相续的断绝,由寿尽等而消失。“断灭死”即阿罗汉相续的完全断灭之死。“称为诸行刹那灭的”即有为法以生灭为限的转起刹那之坏灭、灭尽。“刹那死”即如所说具有刹那、就在那刹那中可得的死。依于诸蕴相续而假立名为树等,即使该相续未断,依鲜活等状态的消失而有“死”的称呼,这是“世俗死”。那并非此处所指的死。意思是:断灭死、刹那死、世俗死,在此死随念中并非所指,因为它们不普遍、不现起、不成为悚惧事。显示巴利原文
167.Itoti devatānussatiyā. Sā hi chasu anussatīsu sabbapacchā niddiṭṭhattā āsannā, paccakkhā ca. Anantarāyāti tadanantaraṃ uddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ. Maraṇassa sati maraṇassatīti maraṇaṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha maraṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmañcettha khandhānaṃ bhedo ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ dvīhi khandhehi saṅgahita’’nti (dhātu. 71) vacanato cutikhandhānaṃ vināso maraṇanti vattabbaṃ, visesato pana taṃ jīvitindriyassa vināsabhāvena kammaṭṭhānikānaṃ paccupatiṭṭhatīti ‘‘jīvitindriyassa upacchedo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha niddese ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo jīvitindriyassupacchedo’’ti (vibha. 236; dī. ni. 2.390; ma. ni. 1.92, 123). Tattha ekabhavapariyāpannassāti ekena bhavena paricchinnassa. Jīvitindriyassa upacchedoti jīvitindriyappabandhassa vicchedo āyukkhayādivasena antaradhānaṃ. Samucchedamaraṇanti arahato santānassa sabbaso ucchedabhūtaṃ maraṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātanti saṅkhatadhammānaṃ udayavayaparicchinnassa pavattikhaṇassa bhaṅgo nirodhoti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Khaṇikamaraṇanti yathāvuttakhaṇavantaṃ tasmiṃyeva khaṇe labbhamānaṃ maraṇaṃ. Yaṃ khandhappabandhaṃ upādāya rukkhādisamaññā, tasmiṃ anupacchinnepi allatādivigamanaṃ nissāya matavohāro sammutimaraṇaṃ. Na taṃ idha adhippetanti taṃ samucchedakhaṇikasammutimaraṇaṃ idha maraṇānussatiyaṃ nādhippetaṃ abāhullato, anupaṭṭhahanato, asaṃvegavatthuto cāti adhippāyo.
这里所意指的,是以念为所缘的死。在寿等灭尽之时而死,称为“时死”;在它们未灭尽之时而死,称为“非时死”。“时死由福尽”这一句,是依所得有的情况而说;若依所失有的情况,则应说“由罪尽”。显示巴利原文
Adhippetaṃ satiyā ārammaṇabhāvena. Āyuādīnaṃ khayakāle maraṇaṃ kālamaraṇaṃ. Tesaṃ aparikkhīṇakāle maraṇaṃ akālamaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Kālamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayenā’’ti idaṃ yathādhikāraṃ sampattibhavavasena vuttaṃ, vipattibhavavasena pana ‘‘pāpakkhayenā’’ti vattabbaṃ.
于寿相续生起因缘具足时:即令寿相续得以转起的食等因缘具足时。由异熟已报:即应给予、与自果相应的果报已给予。由趣、时、食等具足的缺失:即如诸天那般趣具足的缺失,如初劫之人那般时具足的缺失,如北俱卢洲等那般食具足的缺失。“等”字还摄取了气候、干燥、血液等。如同现在的人——此“如同”一词原本置于不当之处,应连为:如同现在之人约百岁的寿量那般,由寿尽故。如此,未来亦含摄了极长寿;而过去,则因趣具足及时、食等具足的存在,也有数千年量的寿命。应知此区别是依现在劫的情况而说。迦罗婆王等,以“等”字应知包含了难陀夜叉、难陀童子等。上述一切,即所说的“时死、非时死,其中又有福尽死、寿尽死、两者尽死、横死”等诸类死亡,皆摄于其中。显示巴利原文
Āyusantānajanakapaccayasampattiyāti āyuppabandhassa pavattāpanakānaṃ āhārādipaccayānaṃ sampattiyaṃ. Vipakkavipākattāti attano phalānurūpaṃ dātabbavipākassa dinnattā. Gatikālāhārādisampattiyāabhāvenāti devānaṃ viya gatisampattiyā, paṭhamakappiyānaṃ viya kālasampattiyā, uttarakurukādīnaṃ viya āhārasampattiyā ca abhāvena. Ādi-saddena utusukkasoṇitādiṃ pariggayhati. Ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ viyāti viya-saddo aṭṭhāne paṭṭhapito, ajjatanakālapurisānaṃ vassasatamattaparimāṇassa viya āyuno khayavasenāti yojanā. Evaṃ hi anāgatepi paramāyuno saṅgaho kato hoti, atīte pana gatisampattiyā viya kālāhārādisampattiyā bhāvena anekavassasahassa parimāṇopi āyu ahosi. Ayañca vibhāgo vattamānassa antarakappassa vasena vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kalāburājādīnanti ādi-saddena nandayakkhanandamāṇavakādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Taṃ sabbampīti yaṃ ‘‘kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇaṃ, tatthāpi puññakkhayamaraṇaṃ āyukkhayamaraṇaṃ ubhayakkhayamaraṇaṃ upakkamamaraṇa’’nti vuttappabhedaṃ maraṇaṃ, taṃ sabbampi.
168 “如理”:即依于方法。“作意”:即以死为所缘的作意。为了以遮遣的方式显示应如何转起作意,故说“不如理转起者”等。其中,“不如理转起者”:即不以方法,未令念、悚惧、智现前而随念死者。所有这一切——忧与喜的生起、悚惧的不生起,以及恐惧的生起——依次是安住于念、悚惧、智者所经历的。因为,若有人忆念智者所说的“死是生者的必然”,他便会于彼处生起悚惧与正知;对于这样的他,所爱之人死等相现前时,忧等便无机可乘。因此,正因不如理作意转起者有这些过患,[故应如理作意。]“处处”:即林野、冢墓等处。“被杀死的众生”:即被盗贼等所杀的众生,以及自然死亡的众生。“曾见圆满者”:即那些曾见过圆满的人,对于曾见圆满者,[作意]连接、令其现起。“于某一类”:即于利根、以慧为增上者。显示巴利原文
168.Yonisoti upāyena. Manasikāroti maraṇārammaṇo manasikāro. Yena pana upāyena manasikāro pavattetabbo, taṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘ayoniso pavattayato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ayoniso pavattayatoti anupāyena satiṃ, saṃvegaṃ, ñāṇañca anupaṭṭhapetvā maraṇaṃ anussarato. Tadetaṃ sabbampīti sokapāmojjānaṃ uppajjanaṃ, saṃvegassa anuppajjanaṃ, santāsassa uppajjanañca yathākkamaṃ satisaṃvegañāṇaviharato hoti. Yo hi ‘‘maraṇaṃ nāmetaṃ jātassa ekantika’’nti paṇḍitānaṃ vacanaṃ sarati, tattha saṃvegajāto hoti sampajāno ca, tassa iṭṭhajanamaraṇādinimittaṃ sokādayo anokāsāva. Tasmāti yasmā ayoniso manasikāraṃ pavattayato ete dosā, tasmā. Tattha tatthāti araññasusānādīsu. Hatamatasatteti corādīhi hate, sarasena mate ca satte. Diṭṭhapubbā sampatti yesaṃ te diṭṭhapubbasampattī, tesaṃ diṭṭhapubbasampattīnaṃ. Yojetvāti upaṭṭhapetvā. Ekaccassāti tikkhindriyassa ñāṇuttarassa.
169 “如杀戮者现前”:因为如同杀戮者一般一再地现前,由于死是邻近的。“圆满与失坏”:因为如同健康等圆满会失坏,生命圆满也会失坏。“引近”:因为示现他人之死,而引近自己之死。“身多共有”:因为身体是许多众生共有的。“寿脆弱”:因为生命是脆弱的。“无定相”:因为死没有确定的相。“时限决定”:因为时间是决定的。“刹那短促”:因为命刹那极为短暂。显示巴利原文
169.Vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānatoti ghātakassa viya pati pati upaṭṭhānato āsannabhāvato. Sampattivipattitoti ārogyādisampattīnaṃ viya jīvitasampattiyā vipajjanato. Upasaṃharaṇatoti paresaṃ maraṇaṃ dassetvā attano maraṇassa upanayanato. Kāyabahusādhāraṇatoti sarīrassa bahūnaṃ sādhāraṇabhāvato. Āyudubbalatoti jīvitassa dubbalabhāvato. Animittatoti maraṇassa vavatthitanimittābhāvato . Addhānaparicchedatoti kālassa paricchannabhāvato. Khaṇaparittatoti jīvitakkhaṇassa ittarabhāvato.
如杀者现前:此处说明‘如’字省略,故说‘如杀者现前’,再开显其义而说‘正如……’等。其中,‘使行走’即威吓、作出攻击的姿态。‘现前’即走近后站在近处。众生是带着老死而生的,因此以‘正如蘑菇芽冒出时并非没有泥土,众生出生时也并非没有老死’这样的譬喻来说明。蘑菇芽有时在某处也可能没有泥土,但众生无论如何都不可能没有老死。如此先以譬喻显示了刹那死,为了指出此处所指的死而说‘如是’等。或者,针对‘如果这些众生带着老死而生,那么出生后随即就应死去’这样的诘难,而说‘如是’等。‘必定死’即必定会死,或决定有死。‘来自山者’即从山而来。‘运载者’即对于落入水流中的草叶等,具有极强的运载性。‘确实在流动’即确实在奔流。‘确实在运转’即确实以水流的方式在运转,而非停止。显示巴利原文
Vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānatoti ettha viya-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti dassento ‘‘vadhakassa viya paccupaṭṭhānato’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha cārayamānoti āgurento paharaṇākāraṃ karonto. Paccupaṭṭhitova upagantvā ṭhito samīpe eva. Jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti ‘‘yathā hi ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ uggacchantaṃ paṃsuvirahitaṃ na hoti, evaṃ sattā nibbattantā jarāmaraṇavirahitā na hontī’’ti ettakena upamā. Ahicchattakamakuḷaṃ kadāci katthaci paṃsuvirahitampi bhaveyya, sattā pana kathañcipi jarāmaraṇavirahitā na hontīti khaṇikamaraṇaṃ tāva upamābhāvena dassetvā idhādhippetaṃ maraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā yadime sattā jarāmaraṇaṃ gahetvāva nibbattanti, nibbattisamanantarameva maritabbanti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi. Avassaṃ maraṇatoti avassaṃ maritabbato, ekantena maraṇasabbhāvato vā. Pabbateyyāti pabbatato āgatā. Hārahārinīti pavāhe patitassa tiṇapaṇṇādikassa ativiya haraṇasīlā. Sandatevāti savati eva. Vattatevāti pavāhavasena vattati eva na tiṭṭhati.
‘于一夜’:即在那一个夜晚,应视为处格用作受格,或表示相续关系。‘第一’:即最初,在结生刹那。‘于胎’:即母胎中。‘摩纳婆’:即有情。因为众生大多在夜晚结生,故说‘夜’。‘如已升起’:即如同已经升起的云,或意为死亡迎面而来。‘他行走’:即那个摩纳婆行走,从第一刹那起便一直在走。‘他行走而不回转’:即他如此行走,连一刹那也不回转,必定只走向死亡。显示巴利原文
Yamekarattinti yassaṃ ekarattiyaṃ, bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, accantasaṃyoge vā. Paṭhamanti sabbapaṭhamaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe. Gabbheti mātukucchiyaṃ. Māṇavoti satto. Yebhuyyena sattā rattiyaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantīti rattiggahaṇaṃ. Abbhuṭṭhitovāti uṭṭhitaabbho viya, abhimukhabhāvena vā uṭṭhitova maraṇassāti adhippāyo. So yātīti so māṇavo yāti, paṭhamakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya gacchateva. Sa gacchaṃ na nivattatīti so evaṃ gacchanto khaṇamattampi na nivattati, aññadatthu maraṇaṃyeva upagacchati.
‘小河’:即从山间流下的小河。‘清晨其束缚随水气者’:即前一日白天,因太阳的热力而进入内部,夜间又回到束缚根源的水气,使束缚湿润松弛,因此清晨时其束缚便随水气。显示巴利原文
Kunnadīnanti pabbatato patitānaṃ khuddakanadīnaṃ. Pāto āporasānugatabandhanānanti purimadivase divā sūriyasantāpena anto anupavisitvā puna rattiyaṃ bandhanamūlaṃ upagatena āporasena tintasithilabandhanatāya pāto āporasānugatabandhanānaṃ.
“逝去”,即迁流不息。“遮止”,即灭尽。“水聚”,即水聚,或指洪流。因为昼夜迁流不息,所以生命被遮止;因为生命被遮止,因此诸有情的寿命便耗尽了。“跌落”,指的是因从树上跌落而生起的恐惧,或是对那些想站在树上从事劳作的人,抑或对已坠入下方的人而言。“上升”,即上升之相。意思是“母亲,请不要阻止我出家”。显示巴利原文
Accayantīti atikkamanti. Uparujjhatīti nirujjhati. Udakameva odakaṃ, udakoghaṃ vā . Yasmā accayanti ahorattā, tasmā jīvitaṃ uparujjhati. Yasmā jīvitaṃ uparujjhati, tasmā āyu khīyati maccānaṃ. Papatatoti papatanato bhayaṃ sāmikānaṃ rukkhe ṭhatvā kamme viniyuñjitukāmānaṃ, heṭṭhā paviṭṭhānaṃ vā. Uggamanaṃ pati uggamananimittaṃ. Mā maṃ amma nivāraya pabbajjāyāti adhippāyo.
有的敌人面带友善,伺机寻找破绽,即便朝夕相处,也未必会出手杀害;然而,死亡却必定会杀戮。为了彰显此义,故说“因其与生俱来”,又说“因其夺取生命”。显示巴利原文
Koci mittamukhasatturandhagavesī saha vattamānopi na haneyya, ayaṃ pana ekaṃsena hanatiyevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sahajātiyā āgatato’’ti vatvā ‘‘jīvitaharaṇato cā’’ti vuttaṃ.
170 ‘成就’即具足。‘快乐’即因似天界的受用和主宰而具足快乐。‘以身束缚’即因身体。‘无忧’即无忧大王。‘陷入忧愁’即达到应忧愁的状态。显示巴利原文
170.Nanti sampattiṃ. Sukhīti dibbasadisehi bhogehi, ādhipateyyena ca sukhasamaṅgī. Dehabandhenāti sarīrena. Asokoti asokamahārājā. Sokamāgatoti socitabbataṃ gato.
青春以健康为特征。疾病与衰老为其终结,正如生命以死亡为终结,这一关系或作为例证被援引,或作为缘的一部分。‘世间’即是世间共住,如同「众生居」;又因共住之义,众生聚集即世间共住。‘随行’:如被仇敌跟随般紧随。‘随入’:如被近侍者渗入般进入。‘被征服’:如被驭象者压制般被压倒。‘被击打’:如被鬼神击打般被打击。显示巴利原文
Ārogyaṃ yobbanānaṃ. Byādhijarāpariyosānatā jīvitassa maraṇapariyosānatāya udāharaṇavasena ānītā, paccayabhāgavasena vā. Lokoyeva lokasannivāso yathā sattāvāsāti, sannivasitabbatāya vā sattanikāyo lokasannivāso. Anugatoti anubandho paccatthikena viya. Anusaṭoti anupaviṭṭho upavisena viya. Abhibhūtoti ajjhotthaṭo maddahatthīhi viya. Abbhāhatoti pahaṭo bhūtehi viya.
‘石’:由石所成,非尘土等所成。‘广大’:巨大,长宽达数由旬。‘触天’:因其广大,遍及虚空,遍满诸方。‘周行’:周遍而行。‘击碎’:将自己所击杀者碎为粉末。‘压制’:征服、制伏。不论族姓、容貌、戒行、闻法或信等尊贵者,在刹帝利等中不避任何人;以这些而卑下者,在首陀罗等中不避任何人;必定碾碎一切。为显示杖等方便于此无效,故说‘那里非象之地’等。其中,‘以咒术战’:依阿闼婆吠陀所规定的咒术战斗方法。‘以财’:即以施财。‘或’字表示未说之选项,由此包含‘以安抚’和‘以离间’。显示巴利原文
Selāti silāmayā, na paṃsuādimayā. Vipulāti mahantā anekayojanāyāmavitthārā. Nabhaṃ āhaccāti vipulattā eva ākāsaṃ abhivihacca sabbadisāsu pharitvā. Anupariyeyyunti anuvicareyyuṃ. Nippothentāti attanā āghātitaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ karontā. Adhivattantīti adhibhavanti. Kulena vā rūpena vā sīlena vā sutena vā saddhādīhi vā seṭṭhoti sambhāvanāya khattiyādīsu na kañci parivajjeti. Tehi eva nihīnoti avamaññamānāya suddādīsu na kañci parivajjeti. Aññadatthu sabbameva abhimaddati nimmathati. Daṇḍādiupāyā ca tattha avisayā evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘na tattha hatthīnaṃ bhūmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mantayuddhenāti āthabbaṇavedavihitena mantasaṅgāmappayogena. Dhanenāti dhanadānena. Vā-saddo avuttavikappanattho. Tena sāmaṃ, bhedañca saṅgaṇhāti.
171 ‘与他人比较自身’:与已死的人相比,‘连他们都死了,何况像我这样的人’,由此导向自身的死亡。‘因名声大’:因随从众多、财富广大。‘因福德大’:因有大福德。‘因力量大’:因精进力量大。坚战是法王之子。恰努罗是被大力天以觉醒方式所杀。显示巴利原文
171.Parehi saddhiṃ attano upasaṃharaṇatoti parehi matehi saddhiṃ ‘‘tepi nāma matā, kimaṅgaṃ pana mādisā’’ti attano maraṇassa upanayanato. Yasamahattatoti parivāramahattato, vibhavamahattato ca. Puññamahattatoti mahāpuññabhāvato. Thāmamahattatoti vīriyabalamahattato. Yudhiṭṭhilo dhammaputto. Cānuro yo baladevena nibbuddhaṃ katvā mārito.
‘与神通一起’:即与震动最胜殿、调伏欢喜与难陀等时所显现的自身神通一起,进入死魔之口。显示巴利原文
Saha iddhīhīti vejayantakampananandopanandadamanādīsu diṭṭhānubhāvāhi attano iddhīhi saddhiṃ maccumukhaṃ paviṭṭho.
‘不值十六分之一分’:即不值十六分中的一分。意思是说:将尊者舍利弗长老的智慧分作十六份,从中取一份再分十六份,所得的那一份便称为‘一分’。除正自觉者之外,其余众生的智慧,皆不及此一分。显示巴利原文
Kalaṃ nagghanti soḷasinti soḷasannaṃ pūraṇabhāgaṃ na agghanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āyasmato therassa sāriputtassa paññaṃ soḷasabhāge katvā tato ekaṃ bhāgaṃ soḷasadhā gahetvā laddhaṃ ekabhāgasaṅkhātaṃ kalaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ sattānaṃ paññā na agghantīti.
一切杂染方面的断除,是依正确方法策励精进者所能成就的,故说‘以智与精进之力’。正因为正见与正精进成就时,八支圣道便已成就。他以独一的状态,如犀牛角般独行。不依他人音声教导,自己证悟诸法、安住不动,故为‘自觉者’。显示巴利原文
Sabbassāpi saṃkilesapakkhassa samugghāto ñāyena āraddhavīriyassa hotīti āha ‘‘ñāṇavīriyabalenā’’ti. Sammādiṭṭhisammāvāyāmesu hi siddhesu aṭṭhaṅgiko ariyamaggo siddhova hotīti. Ekākībhāvena khaggavisāṇakappā. Paratoghosena vinā sayameva bhūtā paṭividdhākuppāti sayambhuno.
如同手上的金环彼此碰撞,又如竹笋不着于任何处——依这些种种相与因缘而作观察。“考察者”,即观察诸法转起与还灭者。因寻求广大戒蕴等,故称“大仙”。“独行居住”,仅指独居的生活方式,并非指戒等成就。以犀牛角为喻者,或以犀牛角为共同譬喻者,即称为“犀牛角同喻者”。显示巴利原文
Hatthagatasuvaṇṇavalayānaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ vaṃsakaḷīrassa katthaci asattatāti evamādikaṃ taṃ taṃ nimittaṃ kāraṇaṃ āgamma. Vīmaṃsantāti pavattinivattiyo upaparikkhantā. Mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esanaṭṭhena mahesayo. Ekacariyanivāsenāti ekacariyanivāsamattena, na sīlādinā. Khaggamigasiṅgasamā upamā yesaṃ, khaggamigasiṅgaṃ vā samūpamā yesaṃ te khaggasiṅgasamūpamā.
以铜色指甲、高耸指甲等八十种随好所庄严,以善安立之足等三十二种大人相所点缀,他的色身奇特殊胜、稀有难得,故称“八十……色身”。连同习气,断尽一切烦恼,故具足一切行相清净的戒蕴等功德宝,成就法身,故称“一切行相……法身”。“处”,即指那刹那。显示巴利原文
Tambanakhatuṅganakhatādiasītianubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitehi suppatiṭṭhitapādatādīhi dvattiṃsāya mahāpurisalakkhaṇehi vicitro acchariyabbhuto rūpakāyo etassāti asīti…pe… rūpakāyo. Saha vāsanāya sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattā sabbākāraparisuddhasīlakkhandhādiguṇaratanehi samiddho dhammakāyo etassāti sabbākāra…pe… dhammakāyo. Ṭhānasoti taṅkhaṇeyeva.
“有如此大威力者”,意即:依如上所说的色身成就与法身成就,可知其佛之威力广大无量、不可测度;任何人不能使其屈从或随顺,故说“未入其掌控”,这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃmahānubhāvassāti evaṃ yathāvuttarūpakāyasampattiyā, dhammakāyasampattiyā ca viññāyamānavipulāparimeyyabuddhānubhāvassa, vasaṃ nāgataṃ anupagamanavasenāti adhippāyo.
“死亡是此之共性”,故称死之共性者;其状态即死之共性性,以此。显示巴利原文
Maraṇaṃ sāmaññaṃ etassāti maraṇasāmañño, tassa bhāvo maraṇasāmaññatā, tāya.
172 172.“虫类”:即虫群,或虫的种类。“衰老”:即到达衰朽。显示巴利原文
172.Kimikulānanti kimisamūhānaṃ, kimijātīnaṃ vā. Jīyantīti jaraṃ pāpuṇanti.
“已出离”:已超越。“已随转”:已随行。“彼于我成障碍”:彼如上所述,不仅指死亡,更是指在我获得这极难得的刹那并安住时,成为忆念师教之障碍。“受损”:即遭破坏。如同以刀切割肢节,死时切断关节连结之风,是为刀风。显示巴利原文
Nikkhanteti vītivatte. Paṭihitāyāti paccānugatāya. So mamassa antarāyoti sā yathāvuttā na kevalaṃ kālakiriyāva, atha kho mama atidullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ labhitvā ṭhitassa satthusāsanamanasikārassa antarāyo assa bhaveyya. Byāpajjeyyāti vipattiṃ gaccheyya. Satthakena viya aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ kantanakā maraṇakāle sandhibandhanacchedanakavātā satthakavātā.
173 “无力”,即力量薄弱。“羸弱”,是它的同义词。这里的“恶”字含有否定的意思,如“恶戒者、恶慧者”等。此指寿命。出入息的均匀,即是相续地进入与外出。当外出至鼻外的风尚未进入内部,或已经进入内部的风尚未外出时,便称为单一的出入息,应知这是就鼻息的共同体性而言。没有过强、过近、所缘等过失,便是威仪路的均匀。被极寒摧伏而导致的身体毁坏,应以摩醯沙罗国等降雪时节来说明——那里的众生因寒冷而身裂命终。被极热摧伏而导致的身体毁坏,应以在沙漠中受热逼迫的篮子、置于其上的上衣,以及踩踏儿子而死的女人等事例来说明。大种的均匀,即是无扰乱。地界等的扰乱会导致身体变异,这将在界业处论中说明。适时,指适合进食之时,也就是被饥饿制伏之时。显示巴利原文
173.Abalanti balahīnaṃ. Dubbalanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Abhāvattho hi ayaṃ du-saddo ‘‘dussīlo (a. ni. 5.213; a. ni. 10.75) duppañño’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.449) viya. Tadetaṃ āyu. Assāsapassāsānaṃ samavuttitā aparāparaṃ pavesanikkhamova. Bahi nikkhantanāsikavāte anto apavisante, paviṭṭhe vā anikkhamanteti ekasseva pavesanikkhamo viya vuttaṃ, taṃ nāsikavātabhāvasāmaññenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Adhimattatāya accāsannaadhiṭṭhānādinā. Tadabhāvo hi iriyāpathānaṃ samavuttitā. Atisītena abhibhūtassa kāyassa vipajjanaṃ mahiṃsaraṭṭhādīsu himapātakālena dīpetabbaṃ. Tattha hi sattā sītena bhinnasarīrā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇanti. Atiuṇhena abhibhūtassa vipajjanaṃ marukantāre uṇhābhitattāya pacchiṃ, tattha ṭhapitaṃ upari sāṭakaṃ, puttañca akkamitvā matāya itthiyā dīpetabbaṃ. Mahābhūtānaṃ samavuttitā pakopābhāvo . Pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ pakopena sarīrassa vikārāpatti parato dhātukammaṭṭhānakathāyaṃ āgamissati. Yuttakāleti bhuñjituṃ yuttakāle khuddābhibhūtakāle.
174 “无决定”,指依于时间等而无从决定。此处“决定”意指分界,并非指无混杂的决定,亦非决断,故说“因无分界”。“不知”,即不被了知。显示巴利原文
174.Avavatthānatoti kālādivasena vavatthānābhāvato. Vavatthānanti cettha paricchedo adhippeto, na asaṅkarato vavatthānaṃ, nicchayo cāti āha ‘‘paricchedābhāvato’’ti. Na nāyareti na ñāyanti.
“此后”:这里“后”指其他的、另一个时间。由此,较短的时间也被含括在内。此处的“后”是就最长寿量之后较短的时段而言。在此之后,众生不复有生命,故不能说“因无决定”。在“如疱、如肉团”等处,“疱时、肉团时”等中的“时”字应各自配合。这里的“时”指上午等时分,因此说“即使在上午”等。所谓应即于此身而亡,这是关联。方式有多种,譬如生于城中的人死于村中,生于村中的人死于城中,生于林中的人死于国土,生于国土的人死于林中等等。从此处死,即是从此趣死;此处,也就是此趣。如同系缚于机械的牛:因为系于机械的牛不能逾越机械,同样,世间亦不逾越五趣,这是譬喻。显示巴利原文
Itoparanti ettha paranti paraṃ aññaṃ kālanti attho. Tena orakālassāpi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Paramāyuto orakālaṃ eva cettha ‘‘para’’nti adhippetaṃ. Tato paraṃ sattānaṃ jīvanassa abhāvato ‘‘vavatthānābhāvato’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti. Abbudapesītiādīsu ‘‘abbudakāle pesikāle’’tiādinā kāla-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Kāloti idha pubbaṇhādivelā adhippetā. Tenāha ‘‘pubbaṇhepi hī’’tiādi. Idheva dehena patitabbanti sambandho. Anekappakāratoti nagare jātānaṃ gāme, gāme jātānaṃ nagare, vane jātānaṃ janapade, janapade jātānaṃ vanetiādinā anekappakārato. Ito cutenāti ito gatito cutena. Idha imissaṃ gatiyaṃ. Yantayuttagoṇo viyāti yathā yante yuttagoṇo yantaṃ nātivattati, evaṃ loko gatipañcakanti ettakena upamā.
175 “少或更多”:即从百岁以上,以“十年、二十年”等计,未达第二个百年,是少分而活之意。“当往”:谓乾闼婆以结生方式投生。“他世”:即他方世界。显示巴利原文
175.Appaṃ vā bhiyyoti vassasatato upari ‘‘dasa vā vassāni, vīsati vā’’tiādinā dutiyaṃ vassasataṃ apāpuṇanto appakaṃ vā jīvatīti attho. Gamanīyoti gandhabbo upapajjanavasena. Samparāyoti paraloko.
“轻蔑”:即轻视、不尊重。“彼”:指寿命。“善士”:即善人、具慧者。“应行”:即应行善行。故说“如头燃者”。显示巴利原文
Hīḷeyyāti paribhaveyya na sambhāveyya. Nanti āyuṃ. Suporisoti sādhupuriso paññavā. Careyyāti sucaritaṃ careyya. Tenāha ‘‘ādittasīsovā’’ti.
以七种比喻——显示巴利原文
Sattahi upamāhīti –
婆罗门,譬如草尖的露珠,太阳升起时迅速消失,不能久住;譬如水中的水泡、水中的杖痕;譬如从山间流出的河,流向远方,水流湍急,冲走所遇之物;譬如大力士将舌尖的唾液团聚集后,可轻易吐出;譬如投入整日烧热的铁锅里的肉片,迅速消失,不能久住;譬如将被宰杀的母牛被牵往屠场时,无论抬起哪只脚,都更接近宰杀,更接近死亡。同样地,婆罗门,人的生命如将被宰杀的母牛之喻,短暂、脆弱、多苦、多忧恼,应以智慧了知,应行善,应修梵行,因为有生者,无有不死。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, brāhmaṇa, tiṇagge ussāvabindu sūriye uggacchante khippaṃyeva paṭivigacchati, na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ hoti. Udake udakapubbuḷaṃ. Udake daṇḍarāji. Nadī pabbateyyā dūraṅgamā sīghasotā hārahārinī. Balavā puriso jivhagge kheḷapiṇḍaṃ saṃyūhitvā akasireneva vameyya. Divasaṃ santatte ayokaṭāhe maṃsapesi pakkhittā khippaṃyeva paṭivigacchati, na ciraṭṭhitikā hoti. Gāvī vajjhā āghātanaṃ nīyamānā yaṃ yadeva pādaṃ uddharati, santikeva hoti vadhassa, santikeva maraṇassa, evamevaṃ kho, brāhmaṇa, govajjhūpamaṃ jīvitaṃ manussānaṃ parittaṃ lahukaṃ bahudukkhaṃ bahupāyāsaṃ mantāyaṃ boddhabbaṃ, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ, caritabbaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, natthi jātassa amaraṇa’’nti (a. ni. 7.74) –
以上这七个譬喻,即用来庄严。显示巴利原文
Evamāgatāhi imāhi sattahi upamāhi alaṅkataṃ.
“日夜”指一个昼夜。“世尊的教法”指能证得圣道的导师之教诫。“我确实做了很多”指我确实为自己做了很多利益,完成了应作的出家事。“那时”指那个刹那、那段时间。“一钵食”指足够维持一日生活的钵食。“迟缓”指缓慢、拖延。“不可信赖”指不可信任、不可依靠。显示巴利原文
Rattindivanti ekaṃ rattindivaṃ. Bhagavato sāsananti ariyamaggapaṭivedhāvahaṃ satthu ovādaṃ. Bahuṃ vata me kataṃ assāti bahuṃ vata mayā attahitaṃ pabbajitakiccaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya. Tadantaranti taṃ khaṇaṃ tattakaṃ velaṃ. Ekaṃ piṇḍapātanti ekaṃ divasaṃ yāpanappahonakaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ. Dandhanti mandaṃ cirāya. Avissāsiyo avissāsanīyo.
176 心持续时,众生方有“生命”的称谓;然而心的刹那极为短暂,因其变化迅疾。正如世尊所说:“比丘们,我不见有其他任何一法,像心这样迅速变化。”(《增支部》1.48;《论事》335)因此,为显示众生的生命因唯有一心刹那而短暂轻微,故说“从究竟意义上”等。其中,“从究竟意义上”一词,驳斥了所谓“长寿者活到百岁”等(《长部》2.7;《相应部》1.145;《增支部》7.74)的生命延续之说,因那只是依相续领域、随顺世俗言说而安立。以“极为短暂”一词——显示巴利原文
176. Citte dharanteyeva sattānaṃ jīvitavohāro, cittassa ca atiittaro khaṇo lahuparivattibhāvato. Yathāha bhagavā ‘‘nāhaṃ, bhikkhave, aññaṃ ekadhammampi samanupassāmi, yaṃ evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, yathayidaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48; kathā. 335). Tasmā sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ ekacittakkhaṇikattā lahusaṃ ittaranti dassento ‘‘paramatthato’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘paramatthato’’ti iminā yāyaṃ ‘‘yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasata’’ntiādinā sattānaṃ (dī. ni. 2.7; saṃ. ni. 1.145; a. ni. 7.74) jīvitappavatti vuttā, sā pabandhavisayattā vohāravasenāti taṃ paṭikkhipati. ‘‘Atiparitto’’ti iminā –
“比丘们,譬如四位力士弓箭手,训练有素、技艺娴熟、箭术精湛,立于四方。这时有人来说:‘我要将这四位……立于四方、训练有素、技艺娴熟、箭术精湛的弓箭手所射之箭,在尚未落地时一一抓住带回。’比丘们,那人的速度,以及日月的速度,比之更快。比丘们,那人的速度、日月的速度,以及运行于日月前方的诸天神的速度——比这些更迅速地,寿命行灭尽。”(《相应部》2.228)显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, cattāro daḷhadhammā dhanuggahā susikkhitā katahatthā katūpāsanā catuddisā ṭhitā assu, atha puriso āgaccheyya ‘ahaṃ imesaṃ…pe… katūpāsanānaṃ catuddisā kaṇḍe khitte appatiṭṭhite pathaviyaṃ gahetvā āharissāmī’ti. Yathā ca, bhikkhave, tassa purisassa javo, yathā ca candimasūriyānaṃ javo, tato sīghataro. Yathā ca, bhikkhave, tassa purisassa javo, yathā ca candimasūriyānaṃ javo, yathā ca yā devatā candimasūriyānaṃ purato dhāvanti, tāsaṃ devatānaṃ javo, tato sīghataraṃ āyusaṅkhārā khīyantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.228) –
如此宣说后,复又遮破“短暂”之说。所以者何?彼处所说色命根刹那——喻如诸天子头下脚上往来奔跑时,绑缚其头脚的剃刀刀片落下所需时间——尚属短暂,而心的刹那则更为极其短暂,乃至无有譬喻能形容。因此他说:“比丘们,乃至譬喻也不易作出,心是如此迅速变化。”(《增支部》1.48)
“命刹那”即生命之刹那。仅只一心转起而已,因为从究竟意义上,众生的命刹那唯由一心转起所限。今为以譬喻阐明此义,故说“正如所谓”等。其中,“正在转起”即正在转起。“一心刹那”即唯有一心刹那之量。当彼心灭去时,即彼正在转起之心刹那——称为“活着”的心,当它灭去、到达坏灭时,具足彼心之众生即称为灭去、死亡。为以经文明示所说之义,故说“正如所说”等。由此显示:于三时中,从究竟意义上,众生之生命唯依心刹那而存在。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaṃ parittampi paṭikkhipati. Tatra hi gamanassādānaṃ devaputtānaṃ heṭṭhupariyena paṭimukhaṃ dhāvantānaṃ sirasi, pāde ca baddhakhuradhārāsannipātatopi parittako rūpajīvitindriyassa so khaṇo vutto, cittassa pana ativiya parittataro, yassa upamāpi natthi. Tenevāha ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ, bhikkhave, upamāpi na sukarā, yāva lahuparivattaṃ citta’’nti (a. ni. 1.48). Jīvitakkhaṇoti jīvanakkhaṇo. Ekacittappavattimattoyeva ekassa cittassa pavattimatteneva sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanakkhaṇassa paricchinnattā. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya pakāsento ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattha pavattamānanti pavattantaṃ. Ekacittakkhaṇikanti ekacittakkhaṇamattavantaṃ. Tasmiṃ citte niruddhamatteti yena vattamānacittakkhaṇena ‘‘jīvatī’’ti vuccati, tasmiṃ citte nirodhaṃ bhaṅgaṃ pattamatte taṃsamaṅgī satto niruddho matoti vuccati. Vuttamevatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena tīsupi kālesu sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanaṃ nāma cittakkhaṇavasenevāti dasseti.
“命”指命根。“苦乐”指苦受与乐受。舍受亦摄于苦乐之中,因其同属可意与不可意之状态。“自身”指除去命、受、识三者之外的其余诸法。“唯”指其自身,或以恒常性而说为不混杂。“与一心俱”指与一一心相应。所谓“刹那迅速流转”,即如所说,因唯有一心刹那,故命等诸法之刹那极其迅速、极为短暂地流转。显示巴利原文
Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhāti sukhadukkhavedanā. Upekkhāpi hi sukhadukkhāsu eva antogadhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhabhāvato. Attabhāvoti jīvitavedanāviññāṇāni ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhadhammā vuttā. Kevalāti attanā, niccabhāvena vā avomissā. Ekacittasamāyuttāti ekekena cittena sahitā. Lahuso vattati khaṇoti vuttanayena ekacittakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiittaro jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati.
“彼已灭去者”,指有情正在死没时,从死心之后可称为“已灭去”的那些蕴。“或于此处住立者”,则指在此生流转中安住、持续者,因到达坏灭而灭去的那些蕴。这两类蕴悉皆相似,皆为同一类。何以故?已去而不复结生,因不再回来结生而消失寂灭。正如死没时的蕴不会回转,于其之前灭去的蕴亦复如是,因此,众生的生命唯有一心刹那,这是其要旨所在。显示巴利原文
Ye niruddhā marantassāti cavantassa sattassa cutito uddhaṃ ‘‘niruddhā’’ti vattabbā ye khandhā. Tiṭṭhamānassa vā idhāti ye vā idha pavattiyaṃ tiṭṭhantassa dharantassa bhaṅgappattiyā niruddhā khandhā. Sabbepi sadisā te sabbepi ekasadisā. Kathaṃ? Gatā appaṭisandhikā puna āgantvā paṭisandhānābhāvena vigatā. Yathā hi cutikhandhā na nivattanti, evaṃ tato pubbepi khandhā, tasmā ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ sattānaṃ jīvitanti adhippāyo.
“依未生起者,非为已生”:依于尚未生起之心,便不是已生,可称为未生。“依现在者而活”:依于现在正在转起之心而活,可称为正在活。世间因心坏灭故名为死:正如死心一般,所有的一一心到达坏灭时,此世间从究竟意义上即名为死,因为已灭者不复再有结生。虽如此,但依于那些持续之心而安立的世俗概念,例如“帝须活着,弗沙活着”等言说所行的相续概念,在此处则是依于究竟法而成为究竟的。正如所说:“名与姓皆不会衰老。”显示巴利原文
Anibbattena na jātoti anuppannena cittena jāto na hoti ajāto nāma hoti. Paccuppannena vattamānena cittena jīvati jīvamāno nāma hoti. Cittabhaṅgā mato lokoti cuticittassa viya sabbassapi tassa tassa cittassa bhaṅgappattiyā ayaṃ loko paramatthato mato nāma hoti niruddhassa appaṭisandhikattā. Evaṃ santepi paññatti paramatthiyā yā taṃ taṃ dharantaṃ cittaṃ upādāya ‘‘tisso jīvati, phusso jīvatī’’ti vacanappavattiyā visayabhūtā santānapaññatti, sā ettha paramatthiyā paramatthabhūtā. Tathā hi vadanti ‘‘nāmagottaṃ na jīratī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.76).
177 以某种方式。所谓心,是指以业处为所缘的心。‘获得习行’是指获得修习的习行,即舍弃向外的散乱,依于专一而唯以死为所缘。因此说‘念住于死所缘而安立’。自性法的坏灭正是落入自性法的范畴,故说‘然而所缘是自性法’。因此世尊说:‘诸比丘,老死是无常、有为、缘生’等语。由于能引发悚惧,即能兴起惊畏,犹如地在震动时会取大变异相一般,随念死时亦会令惊畏层层增上,因此心于彼处修习不得安止。倘若只要是自性法便不能达到安止,那么出世间禅与某些无色禅又如何成立?故说‘然而出世间禅’等语。依于清净修习的次第,即由下分清净的威力所证得的殊胜行道智见清净修习,以及依于由一切行厌离、离染等而转向脱离的安止,令相对的恶法消失——如此依于清净修习的次第,出世间禅便得安止。在那里仅仅是超越所缘而已,即不像其他以自性法为所缘的业处那样,需要作意令心等持,而是以已得等持之心,只须于修习中超越所缘,因此即使于自性法,无色禅亦能安止。显示巴利原文
177.Aññataraññatarena ākārena. Cittanti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇaṃ cittaṃ. Āsevanaṃ labhatīti bhāvanāsevanaṃ labhati, bahiddhā vikkhepaṃ pahāya ekattavasena maraṇārammaṇameva hotīti. Tenāha ‘‘maraṇārammaṇā sati santiṭṭhatī’’ti. Sabhāvadhammānaṃ bhedo sabhāvadhammagatiko evāti āha ‘‘sabhāvadhammattā pana ārammaṇassā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘jarāmaraṇaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppanna’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.20). Saṃvejanīyattāti saṃvegajananato mahābhūtesu mahāvikāratā viya gayhamānā maraṇaṃ anussariyamānaṃ uparūpari ubbegameva āvahatīti tattha na bhāvanācittaṃ appetuṃ sakkoti. Yadi sabhāvadhammattā appanaṃ na pāpuṇāti, lokuttarajjhānaṃ ekaccāni arūpajjhānāni ca kathanti āha ‘‘lokuttarajjhānaṃ panā’’tiādi. Visuddhibhāvanānukkamavasenāti heṭṭhimavisuddhiyā ānubhāvena adhigatātisayāya paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhibhāvanāya, sabbasaṅkhārehi nibbindanavirajjanādivisaṃyogādhimuttiappanāya ca paṭipakkhabhūtānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ vigamoti evaṃbhūtassa visuddhibhāvanānukkamassa vasena lokuttarajjhānaṃ appanāppattameva hoti. Ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattaṃ tattha hotīti aññesaṃ sabhāvadhammārammaṇakammaṭṭhānānaṃ viya cittassa samādhāne byāpāro natthi. Yathāsamāhitena pana cittena ārammaṇasamatikkamanamattameva bhāvanāya kātabbaṃ, tasmā sabhāvadhammepi āruppajjhānaṃ appetīti.
由于多怀悚惧,他恒常不放逸,由此便获得于一切有中不喜乐想。由于见到死是必然,他舍弃对生命的爱着。由于获得无常想,他成为呵责诸恶者,由此便少事积蓄,离垢悭吝。依此而说,即依于无常想的熟习而说。未曾修习死者,即未曾修习死随念者。于临终时无有怖畏、不昏迷,更何况因死想善住立而致如此。显示巴利原文
Satataṃappamatto hoti saṃvegabahulattā, tato evassa sabbabhavesu anabhiratisaññāpaṭilābho. Jīvitanikantiṃ jahāti maraṇassa avassaṃbhāvitādassanato. Pāpagarahī hoti aniccasaññāpaṭilābhato, tato eva asannidhibahulatā, vigatamalamaccheratā ca. Tadanusārenāti aniccasaññāparicayānusārena. Abhāvitamaraṇāti abhāvitamaraṇānussaraṇā. Abhayo asammūḷho kālaṃ karoti pageva maraṇasaññāya sūpaṭṭhitattā.
身至念论注释显示巴利原文
Kāyagatāsatikathāvaṇṇanā
178 ‘诸佛出现于此’故为佛出现,即诸佛出现之时,因此。除此之外,即舍此不论,于他时之义。未曾转起,即未曾转起过。正因如此,其成为一切外道所不能及的领域。难道苏内陀导师等,以及其他苦行者、游行者,不也知道身体是‘不净’的吗?正如须弥陀苦行者厌弃身体时所说:显示巴利原文
178. Buddhā uppajjanti etthāti buddhuppādo, buddhānaṃ uppajjanakālo, tasmā. Aññatra taṃ ṭhapetvā, aññasmiṃ kāleti attho. Na pavattapubbanti apavattapubbaṃ. Tato eva sabbatitthiyānaṃ avisayabhūtaṃ. Nanu ca sunettasatthārādayo (a. ni. 6.54; 7.66, 73), aññe ca tāpasaparibbājakā sarīraṃ ‘‘asubha’’nti jāniṃsu. Tathā hi sumedhatāpasena sarīraṃ jigucchantena vuttaṃ –
何不将此充满种种不净的臭秽之身,
舍弃之后便离去,无顾念,无需求。’
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yannūnimaṃ pūtikāyaṃ, nānākuṇapapūritaṃ; Chaḍḍayitvāna gaccheyyaṃ, anapekkho anatthiko’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.8) –
等等。确实,菩萨及其他苦行者等虽知此身为“不净”,却并非以业处的方式了知,因此说“除佛出现之外”等。由于如实开示了身体的自性,故能令人心生悚惧。“为义”:指为现法等的义利。“为瑜伽安稳”:指为从四轭中获得安稳。“为念正知”:指为令念于一切处不远离,及成就七处正知。“为智见获得”:指为证得观智。“为明解脱果作证”:指为现证三明、心解脱、涅槃及四沙门果。因为此身至念是证得不死涅槃之因,又因其与不死相似、伴有出离之乐,故被称为“不死”。“受用”:指以入定等方式使用。“已失”:指已失败。“已错失”:指因未证得而错过。“已成就”:指已修习、已圆满。在诸经中以种种方式赞叹之后,所指出的此身至念业处,即是这里的关联。然而,在何处指出?在《身至念经》等中。因为在该经中,“诸比丘,如何修习……”等教导已经出现。此处略义如下:比丘们,无论以何种方式修习、反复修习身至念,对于入出息禅那等的圆满有大果报;对于明分法、应证通智之法,以及对于忍耐不喜与喜等的成就,皆有大利。“入出息节”指入出息业处的范围,其余诸节亦同此理。显示巴利原文
Ādi. Kāmaṃ bodhisattā, aññe ca tāpasādayo sarīraṃ ‘‘asubha’’nti jānanti, kammaṭṭhānabhāvena pana na jānanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aññatra buddhuppādā’’tiādi. Saṃvegāya saṃvattati yāthāvato kāyasabhāvappavedanato. Atthāyāti diṭṭhadhammikādiatthāya. Yogakkhemāyāti catūhi yogehi khemabhāvāya. Satisampajaññāyāti sabbattha satiavippavāsāya ca sattaṭṭhāniyasampajaññāya ca. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāyāti vipassanāñāṇādhigamāya. Vijjāvimuttiphalasacchikiriyāyāti tisso vijjā, cittassa adhimutti nibbānaṃ, cattāri sāmaññaphalānīti etesaṃ paccakkhakaraṇāya. Amatassa nibbānassa adhigamahetutāya, amatasadisātappakasukhasahitatāya ca kāyagatāsati ‘‘amata’’nti vuttā. Paribhuñjantīti jhānasamāpajjanena vaḷañjanti. Parihīnanti jinaṃ. Viraddhanti anadhigamena virajjhitaṃ. Āraddhanti sādhitaṃ nipphāditaṃ. Anekehi ākārehi tesu tesu suttantesu pasaṃsitvā yaṃ taṃ kāyagatāsatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhanti sambandho . Kattha pana niddiṭṭhanti? Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo). Tattha hi ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvitā ca bhikkhave’’tiādinā ayaṃ desanā āgatā. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – bhikkhave, kena pakārena kāyagatāsatibhāvanā bhāvitā, kena ca pakārena punappunaṃ katā ānāpānajjhānādīnaṃ nipphattiyā mahapphalā, tesaṃ tesaṃ vijjābhāgiyānaṃ, abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānañca dhammānaṃ, aratiratisahanatādīnañca saṃsiddhiyā mahānisaṃsā ca hotīti? Ānāpānapabbanti ānāpānakammaṭṭhānāvadhi. Esa nayo sesesupi.
虽然藉由界作意业处能成就近行定,但于其中,思惟阶段更为殊胜,因此界作意节也被说为‘依观而说’。‘此身亦如是法、如是性、如是不过去’——在诸处,这一教法是与不净、无常等结合而说,以显示身中的过患,故说‘九种冢墓相等已说’。此处,在膨胀相等中,即在诸冢墓节中所说的膨胀相等。‘依入出息念’即依入出息念修习。为了表明:在上文‘粪、脑’中,脑髓的部分在此巴利圣典中是与骨髓合在一起而宣说的,故说‘将脑髓与骨髓合在一起’。‘此处’指在此随念解说中。‘已至身之念,或于身中已至之念为身至念’——此即以念为首的此三十二行相业处,这是连结。显示巴利原文
Dhātumanasikārakammaṭṭhānena yadipi upacārasamādhi ijjhati, sammasanavāro pana tattha sātisayoti dhātumanasikārapabbampi ‘‘vipassanāvasena vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatīto’’ti (dī. ni. 2.379; ma. ni. 1.112) tattha tattha asubhāniccatādīhi saddhiṃ kāye ādīnavassa vibhāvanavasena desanāya āgatattā ‘‘navasivathika…pe… vuttānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha uddhumātakādīsūti etesu sivathikapabbesu āgatauddhumātakādīsu. Ānāpānassativasenāti ānāpānassatibhāvanāvasena. Yo upari ‘‘karīsaṃ matthaluṅga’’nti matthaluṅgakoṭṭhāso gayhati, taṃ idha pāḷiyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.154) aṭṭhimiñjeneva saṅgaṇhitvā desanā āgatāti dassento ‘‘matthaluṅgaṃ aṭṭhimiñjena saṅgahetvā’’ti āha . Idhāti imasmiṃ anussatiniddese. Kāyaṃ gatā, kāye vā gatā sati kāyagatāsatīti satisīsena idaṃ dvattiṃsākārakammaṭṭhānaṃ adhippetanti yojanā.
179 所谓四大所造,即依止于四大种。‘腐臭身’者,是已腐烂、极恶臭之身。这是就具有行住坐卧姿态的身体而言;或者,在其诸部分中,最下方是足底,故说‘足底以上’。所谓‘横向以皮为界’——此处,难道头发、体毛、指甲以及皮肤本身不是有非以皮为界的情形吗?虽然如此,但由于身体大部分以皮为界,所以身体被称为以皮为界,故如此说。若说以皮为边界,则皮为边界。以这句话,作为身体一部分的皮肤本身已被纳入,而与之相连的头发等,其根部进入皮肤,亦以皮为边界。因此应知,三十二身分的整个集合,整个身体都被称为以皮为界。显示巴利原文
179.Catumahābhūtikanti catumahābhūtasannissayaṃ. Pūtikāyanti pūtibhūtaṃ paramaduggandhakāyaṃ. Ṭhānagamanāvatthaṃ sarīraṃ sandhāya, tassa vā avayavesu sabbaheṭṭhimaṃ pādatalanti vuttaṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ pādatalā’’ti. Tiriyaṃ tacaparicchinnanti ettha nanu kesalomanakhānaṃ, tacassa ca atacaparicchinnatā atthīti? Kiñcāpi atthi, tacaparicchinnabahulatāya pana kāyassa tacaparicchinnatā hotīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Taco pariyanto assāti tacapariyantoti etena pana vacanena kāyekadesabhūto taco gahito eva, tappaṭibaddhā ca kesādayo tadanupaviṭṭhamūlā tacapariyantāva hontīti dvattiṃsākārasamūho sabbopi kāyo tacapariyanto vuttoti veditabbo.
‘有’是以语词颠倒而说,或者它只是一个不变词。因此,于三数中,那只是他的色法。故说‘存在’。从事文字思辨的人们,在解释身体中的‘身’一词时,亦应以不净集合体的意义来理解;为显示此义,他说‘从不净的积聚来说’,接着又以词源学的方法显示,而说‘可厌的’等。其中,‘作为产生处’是因为它是生起的处所。‘充满种种类别’之说。‘哪些是那些类别呢?通过这些类别,种种不净被说到’——为了显示那些头发等,圣典中说‘头发、体毛’等;为了阐明此义,他说‘这些头发等三十二身分’。因为‘行相’与‘类别’同义。如此,应知关联方式:‘在此身中,有指甲’等,在所有的部分中,皆以‘在此身中,有’此三词来关联。显示巴利原文
Atthīti vacanavipallāsena vuttaṃ, nipātapadaṃ vā etaṃ. Tasmā tīsupi saṅkhāsu tadevassa rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṃvijjantī’’ti. Akkharacintakehi sarīre kāya-saddaṃ vaṇṇantehipi asucisamudāyabhāveneva icchitabboti dassento ‘‘asucisañcayato’’ti vatvā puna naṃ niruttinayena dassetuṃ ‘‘kucchitāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āyabhūtatoti uppattiṭṭhānabhūtattā. ‘‘Pūraṃ nānappakārassā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ke pana te pakārā? Yehi nānappakāraṃ asuci vutta’’nti te kesādike dassetuṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādi vuttanti imamatthaṃ dīpento āha ‘‘ete kesādayo dvattiṃsākārā’’ti. Ākārā pakārāti hi eko atthoti. Evaṃ sambandhoti ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye nakhā’’tiādinā sabbakoṭṭhāsesu ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye’’ti padattayena sambandho veditabbo.
“周遍”是说横向;又因在足底与发根处皆可获得皮肤,故称周遍。“清净状态”指清净的存在,或即清净本身。显示巴利原文
Paritoti tiriyaṃ, samantato vā pādatalakesamūlesu ca tacassa labbhanato. Sucibhāvanti sucino sabbhāvaṃ, sucimeva vā.
180 依此方法而善巧于掌握者,此七种方法即名“掌握善巧”,或指由彼所引生的智慧。于作意善巧中,亦同此理。显示巴利原文
180. Yena vidhinā uggahe kusalo hoti, so sattavidho vidhi ‘‘uggahakosalla’’nti vuccati, tannibbattaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ. Manasikārakosallepi eseva nayo.
“正在诵习者”即正在诵习的人。据说,他们在那四个月间诵习,依诵习的方法把握诸身分,依次第修习,三十二身分便愈发明显地显现;不净想得以确立。他们缘取彼相进入禅那,以禅那为基增长观智,证悟了见道。因此说“正在诵习者即成为须陀洹”。显示巴利原文
Sajjhāyantā vāti sajjhāyaṃ karontā eva. Tesaṃ kira cattāro māse sajjhāyantānaṃ sajjhāyamaggeneva koṭṭhāse upadhārentānaṃ paṭipāṭiyā dvattiṃsākārā vibhūtatarā hutvā khāyiṃsu, paṭikkūlasaññā saṇṭhāsi, te tasmiṃ nimitte jhānaṃ appetvā jhānapādakaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dassanamaggaṃ paṭivijjhiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sajjhāyantā va sotāpannā ahesu’’nti.
“划分后”是指依皮五法等而作划分。由于脑髓以地界为多,故说应将其列于粪之后,即最末处。在此,顺诵为:肉、腱、骨、骨髓、肾;逆诵为:肾、骨髓、骨、腱、肉、皮、齿、爪、体毛、发。如此,在肾五法等中,先说顺诵,再说逆诵,如是与前文连贯。在《破迷论》中,将其分为三个五日一组,与前三个五日合为六组五日,来说明诵习的方式,应知这是依最初与最后的差别而显示。因为在顺逆诵中,逆诵是最末的,或也可知这是诵习的另一种方式。显示巴利原文
Paricchinditvāti tacapañcakādivaseneva paricchedaṃ katvā. Pathavīdhātubahulabhāvato matthaluṅgassa karīsāvasāne tantiāropanamāha. Ettha ca maṃsaṃ, nhāru, aṭṭhi, aṭṭhimiñjaṃ vakkaṃ, vakkaṃ aṭṭhimiñjaṃ, aṭṭhi, nhāru, maṃsaṃ, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesāti evaṃ vakkapañcakādīsu anulomasajjhāyaṃ vatvā paṭilomasajjhāyo purimehi sambandho vutto. Svāyaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 356) visuṃ tipañcāhaṃ, purimehi ekato tipañcāhanti chapañcāhaṃ sajjhāyo vutto, tattha ādiantadassanavasena vuttoti daṭṭhabbo. Anulomapaṭilomasajjhāyepi hi paṭilomasajjhāyo antimo hoti, sajjhāyappakārantaraṃ vā etampīti veditabbaṃ.
“手链”即手指诸关节的排列。显示巴利原文
Hatthasaṅkhalikāti aṅgulipantimāha.
“以意诵习”是指以心思维,这种心的意念活动称为“默念”。或者说,“正确地诵习”即是诵习,其含义为思维。由于长时间善巧运作而成为熟练的业处,当行者转而作意时,从初始直至终了,无有滞碍,相续无间地现前;随顺于此,其义也愈发明显而显现,因此他说“以语诵习……成为通达的缘”。“相的通达”即指不净相的通达。显示巴利原文
Manasā sajjhāyoti cittena cintanamāha, yaṃ mānasaṃ ‘‘jappana’’nti vuccati, sammadeva ajjhāyoti vā sajjhāyo, cintananti attho. Cirataraṃ suṭṭhu pavattanena paguṇabhūtā kammaṭṭhānatanti samāvajjitvā manasi karontassa ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā katthaci asajjamānā nirantarameva upaṭṭhāti, tadanusārena tadatthopi vibhūtataro hutvā khāyatīti āha ‘‘vacasā sajjhāyo hi…pe… paṭivedhassa paccayo hotī’’ti. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassāti asubhalakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa.
有些人通过把握颜色来确定诸身分,有些人通过把握形状来确定,有些人通过把握方位区分来确定,有些人通过把握所依处来确定,有些人通过完全划分来确定。因此,从颜色等方面进行观察能带来善巧把握。为了显示这一点,他说:“应确定头发等的颜色……”等等。显示巴利原文
Paṭikkūlasabhāvasallakkhaṇassa kassaci vaṇṇaggahaṇamukhena koṭṭhāsā vavatthānaṃ gacchanti, kassaci saṇṭhānaggahaṇamukhena, kassaci disāvibhāgaggahaṇamukhena, kassaci patiṭṭhitokāsaggahaṇamukhena, kassaci sabbaso paricchijjaggahaṇamukhenāti vaṇṇādito sallakkhaṇaṃ uggahakosallāvahaṃ vuttanti taṃ dassento ‘‘kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo’’tiādimāha.
自身所属的部分称为同类部分。以同类部分所作的划分,是同类划分,即由下方、上方及横边的边界,以及各自部分内的发际等而作划分,这是它的含义。以不混杂性来说,就是依与其它部分不混杂的性质。在这里,“非同类”是指“异类”,而不是指相违的同类。这一意义,从“头发”等词本身即可获得。通过排除其它词义,词才表达其义,因此,当说出“头发”时,便领会了“非头发不存在”的含义。那么,什么是那些非头发呢?就是体毛等,而非瓶等,因为它们已经被排除,不产生关联。显示巴利原文
Attano bhāgo sabhāgo, sabhāgena paricchedo sabhāgaparicchedo, heṭṭhuparitiriyapariyantehi, sakoṭṭhāsikakesantarādīhi ca paricchedoti attho. Amissakatāvasenāti koṭṭhāsantarehi avomissakatāvasena. Asabhāgo hi idha ‘‘visabhāgo’’ti adhippeto, na viruddhasabhāgo. Svāyamattho kesādisaddato eva labbhati. Saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti ‘‘kesā’’ti vutte ‘‘akesā na hontī’’ti ayamattho viññāyati. Ke pana te akesā? Lomādayo, na ca ghaṭādīsu pasaṅgopakaraṇeneva tesaṃ nivattitattā.
这是由于仅从“不净”的角度而说,并且未从界差别的共相来把握的缘故。界差别在《波古萨提经》以及《分别论》中的《界分别》巴利中另有单独解说。对于头发等由颜色现起的人,则针对那人,将诸禅那以头发等中的颜色遍为所缘而加以分别。应了知之后而教导。为显示所说之义,而说“在此,依界……”等。这里的“在此”,是指在这不净作意章节之中。因为在《身至念经》里,取了不净作意的章节后,于此开示身至念的修习。显示巴利原文
Paṭikkūlavaseneva kathitaṃ dhātuvibhāgassa sāmaññatopi agahitattā. Tattheva visuṃ dhātukammaṭṭhānassa kathitattā ca dhātuvibhaṅgo pakkusātisuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.342) vibhaṅgappakaraṇe dhātuvibhaṅgapāḷi (vibha. 172 ādayo) ca. Yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti kesādi, taṃ puggalaṃ sandhāya jhānāni kesādīsu vaṇṇakasiṇārammaṇāni vibhattāni. Ñatvā ācikkhitabbanti yadatthaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha dhātuvasenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbe. Kāyagatāsatisutte (ma. ni. 3.153 ādayo) hi paṭikkūlamanasikārapabbaṃ gahetvā idha kāyagatāsatibhāvanā niddisīyati.
181 “非一间隔”的意思是:不应对一间隔作意,更不用说二间隔等。“不成就修习”指若作意于一间隔,便不能通达其相;这是说明其关联。显示巴利原文
181.Na ekantarikāyāti ekantarikāyapi na manasi kātabbaṃ, pageva dvantarikādināti adhippāyo. Na bhāvanaṃ sampādeti, lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ na pāpuṇāti ekantarikāya manasi karontoti sambandho.
“进入与释放”是指应修习、应舍离之道。由于未能辨识应取、应舍之处,故须先问而后行。所谓“业处达到究竟”,意指从开始直至究竟,仅是作意而已。然而,由于未能善巧辨识厌恶之相,便不明了,因此不成为殊胜。显示巴利原文
Okkamanavissajjananti paṭipajjitabbavissajjetabbe magge. Pucchitvāva gantabbaṃ hoti gahetabbavissajjetabbaṭṭhānassa asallakkhaṇato. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpuṇātīti ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā manasikāramattaṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Avibhūtaṃ pana hoti paṭikkūlākārassa suṭṭhu asallakkhaṇato. Tato eva na visesaṃ āvahati.
“业处不达究竟”是说:若依次第作意一切部分,它们便会清晰地显出。若以较胜的方式作意其厌恶,业处则将达至究竟。但如果作意过于迟钝,则连清晰显出都不可得,更遑论安住于厌恶。因此说“亦不成为证得殊胜之缘”。显示巴利原文
Kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ na gacchatīti paṭipāṭiyā sabbakoṭṭhāse manasi karotoyeva vibhūtā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Te sātisayaṃ pāṭikkūlato manasi karontassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariyosānaṃ gaccheyya, imassa pana ativiya dandhaṃ manasi karoto vibhūtato upaṭṭhānameva natthi, kuto paṭikkūlatāya saṇṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘visesādhigamassa paccayo na hotī’’ti.
“外部的种种所缘”:这是说,舍弃了应于头发等处修习的“不净、厌恶”之随观,转而以净妙等角度来执取头发等,此时即应知道它们就是“外部的种种所缘”。因为色等以青、黄等角度而显现种种自性,故名为种种所缘,即种种所缘之义。心的不安住、丑陋的毁坏即是散乱。修习者应让念善加安住,以恭敬作意于业处,从而排除此散乱。“退失”即减损,“坏灭”即消失。显示巴利原文
Bahiddhāputhuttārammaṇeti ‘‘asuci paṭikkūla’’nti kesādīsu pavattetabbaṃ asubhānupassanaṃ hitvā subhādivasena gayhamānā kesādayopi idha ‘‘bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇamevā’’ti veditabbā. Rūpādayo hi nīlādivasena puthusabhāvatāya puthuttārammaṇaṃ nāma, nānārammaṇanti attho. Asamādhānaṃ cetaso virūpo khepoti vikkhepo. So satiṃ sūpaṭṭhitaṃ katvā sakkaccaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karontena paṭibāhitabbo. Parihāyatīti hāyati. Paridhaṃsatīti vinassati.
这里所说的“头发、身毛”等,是随顺世间共许的假名。“假名”是依八种法而施设的。超越这些头发等的假名,即是以厌恶修习来超越、揭开。由于它们被揭开,当各部分以厌恶的方式现前时,便应将心安住于“厌恶”。现在用譬喻来阐明此义,所以说“犹如”等。此处譬喻的对应如下:犹如人,即瑜伽行者;犹如水井,即各部分;犹如棕榈叶等标记,即头发等假名。就像人们依靠标记在水井沐浴、饮用等,瑜伽行者在前期也依止头发、身毛等假名而作意。如同人们由于频繁往来,即使没有标记也能在水井行事,瑜伽行者以作意之力超越假名,将心安住在厌恶修习中,并专心修习。所谓“在前期……显现”,是指如“头发、身毛”等那样致力修习时,头发等的假名与各部分的厌恶在前期一同显现。然后,即后来修习进入行道时,应将心安置于厌恶,也就是说,应让修习心只在各部分的厌恶相中运行。显示巴利原文
Yāayaṃ kesā lomātiādikā lokasaṅketānugatā. Paṇṇattīti aṭṭha dhamme upādāya paṇṇatti. Taṃ kesādipaṇṇattiṃ. Atikkamitvāti paṭikkūlabhāvanāya atikkamitvā ugghāṭetvā. Tassā ugghāṭitattā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ koṭṭhāse paṭikkūlato upaṭṭhahante ‘‘paṭikkūla’’nti cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ. Idāni tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvento ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādimāha. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ – manussā viya yogāvacaro. Udapānaṃ viya koṭṭhāsā. Tālapaṇṇādisaññāṇaṃ viya kesādipaññatti. Tena manussānaṃ udapāne nhānapivanādi viya yogāvacarassa pubbabhāge kesā lomāti paṇṇattivasena manasikāro. Abhiṇhasañcārena manussānaṃ saññāṇena vinā udapāne kiccakaraṇaṃ viya yogāvacarassa manasikārabalena paṇṇattiṃ atikkamitvā paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetvā bhāvanānuyogo. Pubbabhāge…pe… pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.154) bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa kesādipaññattiyā saddhiṃyeva koṭṭhāsānaṃ paṭikkūlabhāvo pubbabhāge pākaṭo hoti. Athāti pacchā bhāvanāya vīthipaṭipannakāle. Paṭikkūlabhāveyeva cittaṃ ṭhapetabbanti koṭṭhāsānaṃ paṭikkūlākāreyeva bhāvanācittaṃ pavattetabbaṃ.
渐次舍离:即次第地舍离,意思是对不再现前的部分逐一不再现前而舍离。如何是不现前呢?回答是“对于初学者”等。所谓“只触及最后部分而安住”,这是说此业处依照传承,从初始业处起就让作意运转,所以才这么说。因为他的作意就像在心里默诵,只是略过各个部分,并非以辨识相的方式来观察。然而,当他以辨识相的方式善加观察而作意时,有些部分现前,有些不现前。为了开示其行道方法,所以说“然后他”等。在这过程中,他应当先对业处进行作意。应作意多久呢?直到两个部分现前,并且这两者中有一个更清晰地现前为止。显示巴利原文
Anupubbena muñcanaṃ anupubbamuñcanaṃ, anupaṭṭhahantassa anupaṭṭhahantassa muñcananti attho. Kathaṃ pana anupaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘ādikammikassā’’tiādi. Pariyosānakoṭṭhāsameva āhacca tiṭṭhatīti idaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ tantianusārena ādito kammaṭṭhānamanasikāro pavattatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tathā hissa manasā sajjhāyo viya manasikāro te te koṭṭhāse āmaṭṭhamatte katvā gacchati, na lakkhaṇasallakkhaṇavasena. Yadā pana ne lakkhaṇasallakkhaṇavasena suṭṭhu upadhārento manasi karoti, tadā keci upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tattha paṭipajjanavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘athassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kammanti manasikārakammaṃ tāva kātabbaṃ. Kīva ciranti? Yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu, tesampi dvinnaṃ eko suṭṭhutaraṃ upaṭṭhahati tāva.
“于蹲踞起立之处即起立”是指:如前所述,于一处蹲踞,随后次第遍及所有棕榈树,一再起立,直至边际的棕榈树与最初的棕榈树,然后于各处所作的蹲踞中起立。这是它的意思。显示巴利原文
Ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāneyevauṭṭhahitvāti pubbe viya ekatthakatāya ukkuṭṭhiyā kamena sabbatālesu patitvā uṭṭhahitvā uṭṭhahitvā pariyantatālaṃ , āditālañca āgantvā tato tato tattha tattheva katāya ukkuṭṭhiyā uṭṭhahitvāti attho.
“二乞食”指于两家所得的乞食。显示巴利原文
Dve bhikkhāti dvīsu gehesu laddhabhikkhā.
“安止”是指以安止的方式,于三十二身分中成办安止。在审察这些身分是各个分别有安止,还是另有其他方式时,说“从安止的部分”,义即从部分、从部分。因此说“于头发等”等。显示巴利原文
Appanātoti appanākārato dvattiṃsākāre appanā honti. Kiṃ paccekaṃ koṭṭhāsesu hoti udāhu aññathāti vicāraṇāyaṃ āha ‘‘appanākoṭṭhāsato’’ti, koṭṭhāsato koṭṭhāsatoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘kesādīsū’’tiādi.
上心,即指止观之心。显示巴利原文
Adhicittanti samathavipassanācittaṃ.
“已致力”即已投入、已实践,意为正在修习。“适时”即于合适的时机。定相是已被觉察的定之状态,即定本身。“应作意”即应于心而作,应令其生起之意。或者,定之因——所缘即为定相,应作意于此。对于策励相与舍相,也同样适用此理。“有处”为省略之说。即令心可能导向懈怠的修习,可转为有处、有因,此为义。或者,令心可能导向懈怠的作意,可转为有处、有因,此为义。“柔软”即因善巧修习而柔软,达到自在之意。因柔软而适业、堪任于业、适合于业。“极净”即因去除随烦恼而清净、洁白。且非易坏,即因达到堪任状态而具有不易损坏之性,如同纯净的黄金堪任锻造。因此说善等持,是为了漏尽。显示巴利原文
Anuyuttenāti yuttappayuttena, bhāventenāti attho. Kālenakālanti kāle kāle. Samādhinimittaṃ upalakkhitasamādhānākāro samādhi eva. Manasi kātabbanti citte kātabbaṃ, uppādetabbanti attho. Samādhikāraṇaṃ vā ārammaṇaṃ samādhinimittaṃ, taṃ āvajjitabbanti attho. Paggahanimittaupekkhānimittesupi eseva nayo. Ṭhānaṃ atthīti vacanaseso. Taṃ bhāvanā cittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya, etassa saṃvattanassa ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthīti attho. Taṃ vā manasikaraṇacittaṃ kosajjāya saṃvatteyya, etassa ṭhānaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthīti attho. Mudunti subhāvitabhāvena mudubhūtaṃ, vasībhāvappattanti attho. Muduttā eva kammaññaṃ kammakkhamaṃ kammayoggaṃ. Pabhassaranti upakkilesavigamena parisuddhaṃ, pariyodātanti attho. Na ca pabhaṅgūti kammaniyabhāvūpagamanena na ca pabhijjanasabhāvaṃ suddhantaṃ viya suvaṇṇaṃ viniyogakkhamaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sammā samādhiyati āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti.
“制火炬”指制作坩埚。“点燃”指使之着火、燃烧。“且若彼”指那位金匠,他享受、获得、成就了那被称为装饰品的目的与利益。或者,金匠享受、获得了那黄金的利益。显示巴利原文
Ukkaṃ bandhatīti mūsaṃ sampādeti. Ālimpetīti ādīpeti jāleti. Tañcāti taṃ piḷandhanavikatisaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ payojanaṃ assa suvaṇṇakārassa anubhoti pahoti sādheti. Assa vā suvaṇṇassa atthaṃ suvaṇṇakāro anubhoti pāpuṇāti.
“Abhiññāya”指以神通智等应亲证的、神通之亲证等类的、应证悟的神通。凡对此有现量体验者,即是见证者。见证者的堪能性称为“见证堪能性”,也就是说能成为见证者。或者,既是见证者又是堪能者,故为“见证堪能者”。因此,此人对神通等堪能,且在其中为见证者,故为见证堪能者;其状态即见证堪能性,他成就此性。“Sati sati āyataneti”指当彼彼因缘等条件具足时。显示巴利原文
Abhiññāya iddhividhādiñāṇena sacchikaraṇīyassa iddhividhapaccanubhavanādikassa abhiññā sacchikaraṇīyassa. Yassa paccakkhaṃ atthi, so sakkhi. Sakkhino bhabbatā sakkhibhabbatā, sakkhibhavananti vuttaṃ hoti. Sakkhi ca so bhabbo cāti vā sakkhibhabbo. Ayañhi iddhividhādīnaṃ bhabbo, tattha ca sakkhīti sakkhibhabbo, tassa bhāvo sakkhibhabbatā, taṃ pāpuṇāti. Sati sati āyataneti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pubbahetuādike kāraṇe sati.
“Sītibhāvanti”指涅槃,或指烦恼热恼的寂灭。“Niggaṇhātī”指为防护掉举之心免于陷入掉举而抑制它。“Paggaṇhātī”指为防护沉滞之心免于陷入懈怠而策励它。“Sampahaṃsetī”指当心平等运转时,以智慧令其在那状态中喜悦或激励。或者,当心无味著而不投入修习时,则观察生等可畏之事,令心喜悦、激励。“Ajjhupekkhatī”指当心既不沉滞也不掉举、正确进入修行之道时,犹如车夫对于平稳行进的一对马,不作抑制、策励或令喜悦的努力,只是旁观而保持舍心。“Paṇītādhimuttikoti”指心倾向于殊胜、最上的道果,趣向、倾向、朝向彼。显示巴利原文
Sītibhāvanti nibbānaṃ, kilesadarathavūpasamaṃ vā. Niggaṇhātīti uddhaṭaṃ cittaṃ uddhaccapātato rakkhaṇavasena niggaṇhāti. Paggaṇhātīti līnaṃ cittaṃ kosajjapātato rakkhaṇavasena paggaṇhāti. Sampahaṃsetīti samappavattaṃ cittaṃ tathāpavattiyaṃ paññāya toseti, uttejeti vā. Yadā vā nirassādaṃ cittaṃ bhāvanāya na pakkhandati, tadā jātiādīni saṃvegavatthūni (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.418; itivu. aṭṭha. 37) paccavekkhitvā sampahaṃseti samuttejeti. Ajjhupekkhatīti yadā pana cittaṃ alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ sammadeva bhāvanāvīthiṃ otiṇṇaṃ hoti, tadā paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu kañci byāpāraṃ akatvā samappavattesu yugesu sārathi viya ajjhupekkhati upekkhakova hoti. Paṇītādhimuttikoti paṇīte uttame maggaphale adhimutto ninnapoṇapabbhāro.
“Suggahitaṃ katvāti”指如所说,将称为“掌握善巧”的方法,通过学得等善加掌握、善加把握。“Suṭṭhu vavatthapetvāti”指将称为“作意善巧”的方法,正确地以随观的方式确定。“Visesanti”指前后修习的差别。“Punappunaṃ parivattetvāti”指为使业处传承熟练,以语、以意一再地反复温习。“Gaṇṭhiṭṭhānanti”犹如树木或森林中难以穿透的稠密处称为“结节处”,同样,业处传承中意义上难以穿透、稠密之处称为“结节处”。应以通过遍问等所获得的智斧斩断彼。显示巴利原文
Suggahitaṃ katvāti yathāvuttaṃ uggahakosallasaṅkhātaṃ vidhiṃ suṭṭhu uggahitaṃ pariyāpuṇanādinā supariggahitaṃ katvā. Suṭṭhu vavatthapetvāti manasikārakosallasaṅkhātaṃ vidhiṃ sammadeva sallakkhaṇavasena upadhāretvā. Visesanti pubbenāparaṃ bhāvanāya visesaṃ. Punappunaṃ parivattetvāti kammaṭṭhānatantiṃ paguṇabhāvaṃ pāpento bhiyyo bhiyyo vācāya, manasā ca parivattetvā. Gaṇṭhiṭṭhānanti yathā rukkhassa dubbinibhedo araññassa vā gahanabhūto padeso ‘‘gaṇṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati, evaṃ kammaṭṭhānatantiyā atthato dubbinibhedo gahanabhūto ca padeso ‘‘gaṇṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Taṃ paripucchanādiladdhena ñāṇapharasunā chinditvā.
“Nimittanti”指业处相,即不净相。为说明以这些目的,拔除也无过失,故说“luñcitvā”(拔已)。“Chinnaṭṭhāneti”指剃除之处。以出离心观察,实为可行。“Ussadavasenāti”指未破裂或已破裂者,以多为胜。见后即应取相,因皮等五处适于观察;对其余者,则应在闻后、知后取相。显示巴利原文
Nimittanti kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ, asubhākāro. Edisena payojanena luñcanampi anavajjanti dassetuṃ ‘‘luñcitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Chinnaṭṭhāneti muṇḍitaṭṭhāne. Vaṭṭatiyeva nissaraṇajjhāsayena olokanato. Ussadavasenāti aphalitānaṃ, phalitānaṃ vā bahulatāvasena. Disvāva nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ dassanayogyatāya tacapañcakassa, itaresu sutvā ca ñatvā ca nimittaṃ gahetabbaṃ.
诸部分辨定论注释显示巴利原文
Koṭṭhāsavavatthāpanakathāvaṇṇanā
182 “Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇāti”指阿利咤新果之色。“Kaṇṇacūḷikāti”是就耳廓上部的边缘而说。横向彼此分隔,如何呢?即两根头发不会合在一处。显示巴利原文
182.Addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇāti abhinavāriṭṭhaphalavaṇṇā. Kaṇṇacūḷikāti uparikaṇṇasakkhalikāya parabhāgaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā, kathaṃ? Dve kesā ekato natthīti.
“Āsayoti”指依止,“paccayoti”指缘。显示巴利原文
Āsayoti nissayo, paccayoti attho.
184 “Asambhinnakāḷakā”指不与任何其他颜色相混的纯黑色。显示巴利原文
184.Asambhinnakāḷakā aññena vaṇṇena asammissakāḷakā.
185 形似叶片的即是爪甲。说“爪甲横向彼此分隔”,是就它们各自独立安立而言。为阐明此义,故说“两片爪甲不可能合在一处”。显示巴利原文
185. Pattasadisattā nakhā eva nakhapattāni. Nakhā tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnāti visuṃ vavatthitataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dve nakhā ekato natthī’’ti āha.
186 “Dantapāḷiyāti”指齿列。“Yānakaupatthambhinīti”指车辕处的支撑杆。支撑牙齿的骨是颚骨。显示巴利原文
186.Dantapāḷiyāti dantāvaliyā. Yānakaupatthambhinīti sakaṭassa dhuraṭṭhāne upatthambhakadaṇḍo. Dantānaṃ ādhārabhūtā aṭṭhi hanukaṭṭhi.
187 “Saṅkaḍḍhiyamānā”意指被聚集、被压实。“Kosakārakakoso”即蚕茧,亦称为“koseyyaphala”。“Puṭabandhaupāhano”是覆盖整个脚背的鞋。“Ānisadaṃ”是坐处。“Tūṇiro”是箭筒。“Galakañcukaṃ”是护喉。“Kīṭakulāvakaṃ”是犀鸟巢。显示巴利原文
187.Saṅkaḍḍhiyamānāti sampiṇḍiyamānā. Kosakārakakoso upalliṇḍupoṭṭalakaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘koseyyaphala’’ntipi vuccati. Puṭabandhaupāhano sakalapiṭṭhipādacchādanaupāhano. Ānisadaṃ āsanapadeso. Tūṇiro sarāvāso. Galakañcukaṃ kaṇṭhattāṇaṃ. Kīṭakulāvakaṃ kharamukhakuṭi.
“Anulomena paṭilomena ca”其中,从肩部沿手臂背面下行为顺,从腕部沿手臂前面上行为逆。以同样方法,即依右手所述之法,而有顺与逆之义。“Sukhumampīti”指比前述粗皮更细者。或者,在口腔内皮等部分中,因被皮所限定而难以觉察者,称为“细”。以彼所述方法,以智剥离皮而观察,即可明了。此处,外皮亦属皮之类,故说“皮上方以虚空为界”。显示巴利原文
Anulomena paṭilomena cāti ettha aṃsapadesato paṭṭhāya bāhuno piṭṭhipadesena otaraṇaṃ anulomo, maṇibandhato paṭṭhāya bāhuno purimabhāgena ārohanaṃ paṭilomo. Teneva nayenāti dakkhiṇahatthe vuttena nayena anulomena paṭilomena cāti attho. Sukhumampīti yathāvuttaoḷārikacammato sukhumaṃ. Antomukhacammādikoṭṭhāsesu vā tacena paricchinnattā yaṃ durupalakkhaṇīyaṃ, taṃ ‘‘sukhuma’’nti vuttaṃ. Tañhi vuttanayena ñāṇena tacaṃ vivaritvā passantassa pākaṭaṃ hoti. Idha chavipi tacagatikā evāti ‘‘taco upari ākāsena paricchinno’’ti vutto.
188 “Nisadapoto”指小石砧。“Uddhanakoṭī”指用泥团所做的灶的边缘。“Tālaguḷapaṭalaṃ nāma”是指将熟多罗果的汁液涂于多罗叶等上,晒干后揭取而成的薄层。“Sukhumanti”指比前述肉更细者。由于脚跟肉等粗大处及全身瘦弱处大部分被肉覆盖,故称“横向相互分隔”。显示巴利原文
188.Nisadapoto silāputtako. Uddhanakoṭīti mattikāpiṇḍena katauddhanassa koṭi. Tālaguḷapaṭalaṃ nāma pakkatālaphalalasikaṃ tālapaṭṭikādīsu limpitvā sukkhāpetvā uddharitvā gahitapaṭalaṃ. Sukhumanti yathāvuttamaṃsato sukhumaṃ. Paṇhikamaṃsādithūlānaṃ sakalasarīrassa kisānaṃ yebhuyyena maṃsena paṭicchāditattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinna’’nti.
189 所谓“网状紧身衣”,正如诸筋腱:各各独立安立,横向彼此分隔。显示巴利原文
189. Jālākāro kañcuko jālakañcuko. Visuṃ vavatthitabhāveneva nhārū tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā.
190 由于齿骨已单独摄持,故说“除三十二齿骨外”。说“一膝骨、一腿骨”中的“一”,是就“每一足”而附加的。应知“如是三量等”是以“量”等词来显示此处未提及的臀骨等。如此,“超过三百骨的聚集”这句话也便得以成立。显示巴利原文
190. Dantānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā ‘‘ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsa dantaṭṭhīnī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekaṃ ūruṭṭhīti eka-ggahaṇaṃ ‘‘ekekasmiṃ pāde’’ti adhikatattā. Evaṃ timattānīti evaṃ mattasaddehi ānisadaṭṭhiādīni idha avuttānipi dassetīti veditabbaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘atirekatisataaṭṭhikasamussaya’’nti (visuddhi. 1.122) idañca vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
游戏之球,是以线串连小球,使它们互相碰撞而戏耍的球。弓杖,是儿童游戏用的小弓。其中,胫骨安立之处,意指其进入膝盖骨内而安住之处。由大腿骨所安立之处,即髋骨所在处,其形状如同顶端被截去的大蒲桃果。显示巴利原文
Kīḷāgoḷakāni suttena bandhitvā aññamaññaṃ ghaṭṭetvā kīḷanagoḷakāni. Dhanukadaṇḍo dārakānaṃ kīḷanakakhuddakadhanukaṃ. Tattha jaṅghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānanti jaṇṇukaṭṭhimhi pavisitvā ṭhitaṭṭhānanti adhippāyo. Tena ūruṭṭhinā patiṭṭhitaṃ ṭhānaṃ yaṃ kaṭiṭṭhino, taṃ aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasadisaṃ.
由陶匠制成的炉灶,称为陶匠灶。缠头布缠好后安立的头板,即为头制木板。在纺线工具中穿孔安设的圆球,名为纺轮;纺轮成排连列,称为纺轮列。显示巴利原文
Kumbhakārena nipphāditaṃ uddhanaṃ kumbhakārikauddhanaṃ. Sīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakaṃ veṭhetvā ṭhapitaṃ sīsamayaṃ paṭṭakaṃ. Yena suttaṃ kantanti, tasmiṃ takkamhi vijjhitvā ṭhapitagoḷakā vaṭṭanā nāma, vaṭṭanānaṃ āvaḷi vaṭṭanāvaḷi.
将竹笋块切成圆环状,称为竹笋圆轮。用来刮削的小刀,是指刮削甘蔗皮所用的小刀。显示巴利原文
Maṇḍalākārena chinnavaṃsakaḷīrakhaṇḍāni vaṃsakaḷīracakkalakāni. Avalekhanasatthakaṃ ucchutacāvalekhanasatthakaṃ.
192 以肾脏部分为界限,意即由肾脏边缘所限定。自此以下,凡遇此类情形,皆依同一方法理解。显示巴利原文
192.Vakkabhāgena paricchinnanti vakkapariyantena bhāgena paricchinnaṃ. Ito paresupi evarūpesu eseva nayo.
193 所谓‘依止’,是指依止于某种血液,而所依止的对象本身亦被称为‘依止’。因为即使是因中之因,也可得因之名,例如说‘贼烧了村庄’。或者,在某种色聚中,心脏依处亦以此血液所行状态而住立,因此说为‘依止’。显示巴利原文
193.Yaṃnissāyāti yaṃ lohitaṃ nissāya, nissayanissayopi ‘‘nissayo’’tveva vuccati. Bhavati hi kāraṇakāraṇepi kāraṇavohāro yathā ‘‘corehi gāmo daḍḍho’’ti. Atha vā yasmiṃ rūpakalāpe hadayavatthu , tampi lohitagatikameva hutvā tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘yaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
194 ‘淡黄色界’,是指淡黄色的本质。显示巴利原文
194.Paṇḍukadhātukanti paṇḍusabhāvaṃ.
195 ‘覆蔽肉’,是指起覆蔽作用的肉。显示巴利原文
195.Pariyonahanamaṃsanti paṭicchādakamaṃsaṃ.
196 “腹舌肉”指位于腹部上方侧面、形状如舌的肉。言“蓝色”之后,因蓝色有多种界,故说“如黄荆花的颜色”。显示巴利原文
196.Udarajivhāmaṃsanti jivhāsaṇṭhānaṃ udarassa matthakapasse tiṭṭhanakamaṃsaṃ. ‘‘Nīla’’nti vatvā nīlaṃ nāma bahudhātukanti āha ‘‘nigguṇḍipupphavaṇṇa’’nti.
197 “肺肉”指仍悬挂于原位、稍稍翻转的肉。“无味”即低劣之味。“无光泽”即无有光彩,或缺少光泽。显示巴利原文
197.Papphāsamaṃsanti yathāṭhāne eva lambitvā thokaṃ parivattakamaṃsaṃ. Nirasanti nihīnarasaṃ. Nirojanti nippabhaṃ, ojārahitaṃ vā.
198 “弯曲”指弯折而立。“如石灰石色”指由石灰石制成的石灰之颜色。也有读作“如白石灰石色”,意为白色石灰石的颜色,以及石灰的颜色。显示巴利原文
198.Obhaggāti avabhujitvā ṭhitā. Sakkharasudhāvaṇṇanti marumbehi katasudhāvaṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Setasakkharasudhāvaṇṇa’’ntipi pāṭho, setasakkharavaṇṇaṃ, sudhāvaṇṇañcāti attho.
199 肠在弯曲又弯曲之后安立之处,即是肠的弯转部位。为了说明那些部位的绑缚名为‘肠索’,所以说‘肠索是在肠弯转部位的绑缚’。如同制作锄头、斧头等物时,把肠的弯转部位不使滑脱地绑在一起,像什么呢?就像机械的线绳将机械板片绑在一起。如何在那里安立呢?说‘如擦脚布……安立’。应知此处前者是绑缚的譬喻,后者是安立形状的譬喻。显示巴利原文
199. Antassa ābhujitvā ābhujitvā ṭhitappadesā antabhogaṭṭhānāni. Tesaṃ bandhanabhūtaṃ antaguṇaṃ nāmāti dassento āha ‘‘antaguṇanti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhana’’nti. Kuddālapharasukammādīni karontānaṃ antabhoge agaḷante ekato ābandhitvā, kiṃ viya? Yantasuttakamiva yantaphalakānīti. Kimiva tattha ṭhitanti āha ‘‘pādapuñchana…pe… ṭhita’’nti. Purimañcettha ābandhanassa, dutiyaṃ ṭhānākārassa nidassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
200 ‘所食’者,指所吃的米饭等。‘所饮’者,指通过饮用而吞下的饮料等。‘所嚼’者,指所咀嚼的粉食、根、果、硬食等。‘所尝’者,指所品尝的熟芒果、蜂蜜、糖蜜等。显示巴利原文
200.Asitaṃ nāma bhuttaṃ odanādi. Pītaṃ nāma pivanavasena ajjhohaṭapānakādi. Khāyitaṃ nāma saṃkhāditaṃ piṭṭhamūlaphalakhajjādi. Sāyitaṃ nāma assāditaṃ ambapakkamadhuphāṇitādi.
‘Yattha’者,指在那个腹部之中。‘Yaṃ’则回指腹部本身。饮食等落入后停留之处,这便是其关联。‘Suvānavamathu’者,指犬的呕吐物。‘Viveka’者,指分别、区分。显示巴利原文
Yatthāti yasmiṃ udare. Yanti ca udarameva paccāmasati. Yattha pānabhojanādīni patitvā tiṭṭhatīti sambandho. Suvānavamathu sārameyyavantaṃ. Vivekanti vibhāgaṃ.
201 ‘于脐下与脊骨根之间’:即依身体前侧,在脐的下方;依身体后侧,在下脊骨的中间。意思是如竹管状的区域。显示巴利原文
201.Heṭṭhānābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānaṃantareti purimabhāgavasena nābhiyā heṭṭhāpadesassa pacchimabhāgavasena heṭṭhimapiṭṭhikaṇṭakānaṃ vemajjhe. Veḷunāḷikasadiso padesoti adhippāyo.
202 ‘积聚’:即堆积。显示巴利原文
202.Samohitanti nicitaṃ.
204 已经腐烂的鸡蛋,称为腐蛋。‘Uddeko’:指不杂有胆汁等、纯粹向上的风。显示巴利原文
204. Pūtibhāvaṃ āpannaṃ kukkuṭaṇḍaṃ pūtikukkuṭaṇḍaṃ. Uddeko pittādīhi vinā kevalo uddhaṅgamavāto.
205 “Ācāmo”者,即过滤后的酸粥。显示巴利原文
205.Ācāmo avassāvanakañjikaṃ.
206 “肾脏、心脏、肝脏、肺被湿润”一句:此处,肝脏因下方液体充满而湿润;其余诸脏,则因上方有少量滴流而湿润——应如此观。显示巴利原文
206.Vakkahadayayakanapapphāse temayamānanti ettha yakanaṃ heṭṭhābhāgapūraṇeneva temeti, itarāni tesaṃ upari thokaṃ thokaṃ paggharaṇenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
207 “时节变异”者,以炎热、云等为因。“不均匀流出”者,如同莲藕束等不均匀地流出水,为了显示身体经由毛孔等孔窍,向上、向下、横向不均匀地流汗,故说“不均匀流出”。显示巴利原文
207.Utuvikāro uṇhavalāhakādihetuko. Visamacchinno bhisādikalāpo visamaṃ udakaṃ paggharati, evamevaṃ sarīraṃ kesakūpādivivarehi upari, heṭṭhā, tiriyañca sedaṃ visamaṃ paggharatīti dassetuṃ visamacchinna-ggahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
208 “不适当食物”:指对现前身体状况不适宜的食物,或过于辛辣、过热等不相称的食物。而在《迷惑冰消》中,只说为“不相称食物”,因为对于现前诸界而言是不相称的。显示巴利原文
208.Visamāhāranti tadāpavattamānasarīrāvatthāya asappāyāhāraṃ, atikaṭukaaccuṇhādivisabhāgāhāraṃ vā. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 356) pana ‘‘visabhāgāhāra’’ntveva vuttaṃ tadā pavattamānānaṃ dhātūnaṃ visabhāgattā.
209 “沐浴时”者,这是为了显示水面上有油脂产生而说。“旋转的油滴散布状”者,指油脂散布后呈现旋转的油滴形状。时节不相称是外部生起的。界不相称是内部生起的。“那些部位”者,指那些手掌等部位。显示巴利原文
209.‘‘Nhānakāle’’ti idaṃ udakassa upari sinehassa sambhavadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Paribbhamantasinehabinduvisaṭasaṇṭhānāti visaṭaṃ hutvā paribbhamantasinehabindusaṇṭhānā. Utuvisabhāgo bahiddhāsamuṭṭhāno. Dhātuvisabhāgo antosamuṭṭhāno. Te padesāti te hatthatalādipadesā.
210 “任何”者,指辣味等诸味中的某种食物。“Nesaṃ”者,指众生的。“心脏感到翻搅”者,指由于不相称的食物等,心脏部位发生搅动变异。显示巴利原文
210.Kiñcīti uṇhādirasānaṃ aññataraṃ āhāravatthu. Nesanti sattānaṃ. Hadayaṃ āgilāyatīti visabhāgāhārādiṃ paṭicca hadayappadeso vivattati.
211 ‘乳清’:指从凝乳中渗出的液体。‘流下后’:即流动以后。‘经上颚顶孔下降后’:指从顶孔而来,经上颚顶部降下。显示巴利原文
211. Dadhino vissandanaaccharaso dadhimuttaṃ. Gaḷitvāti sanditvā. Tālumatthakavivarena otaritvāti matthakavivarato āgantvā tālumatthakena otaritvā.
212 犹如油对车轴、毂与轴头所起的润滑作用,它成就了骨节间的润滑。‘发出咔咔声’:即发出‘咔、咔’的声音。这是表示随转。‘痛苦’:即苦的、已生起苦的。显示巴利原文
212. Telaṃ viya sakaṭassa nābhiakkhasīsānaṃ aṭṭhisandhīnaṃ abbhañjanakiccaṃ sādhayamānā. Kaṭakaṭāyantīti ‘‘kaṭa kaṭā’’ti saddaṃ karonti. Anuravadassanaṃ hetaṃ. Dukkhantīti dukkhitāni sañjātadukkhāni honti.
213 将连根带茎的绿豆烧过,滤灰后取得的汁液,称为绿豆碱。倾倒残食水、胎垢等的地方,是粪池。‘响瓶’通常正面有口。然而,为了显示那种连针尖大进水口都没有的瓶,故说‘在无口的响瓶中’。‘积聚’:即汇集。显示巴利原文
213. Samūlakūlamāsaṃ jhāpetvā chārikaṃ avassāvetvā gahitayūso māsakhāro. Ucchiṭṭhodakagabbhamalādīnaṃ chaḍḍanaṭṭhānaṃ candanikā. Ravaṇaghaṭaṃ nāma pakatiyā sammukhameva hoti. Yassa pana āraggamattampi udakassa pavisanamukhaṃ natthi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘amukhe ravaṇaghaṭe’’ti vuttaṃ. Āyūhananti samīhanaṃ.
214 “如是”等语,是对前述掌握取相善巧之修行的结语。现在,为了以结语的方式一并摄持前述掌握作意善巧之修行,并显示令业处达到顶点,故以“从次第”等语开始。其中,“于施设超越之终”是指,依超越头发等施设而进行的修习之终。“如未曾有之次第”,意为如同未曾有般合为一体。“发”之“iti”声,是“等”义或“方式”义,即“依这些方式”之义。“那些诸法”是指,依颜色等而确定的、以厌恶相现前的部分诸法。显示巴利原文
214.Evañhītiādi yathāvuttāya uggahakosallapaṭipattiyā nigamanaṃ. Idāni yathāvuttaṃ manasikārakosallapaṭipattimpi nigamanavasena gahetvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘anupubbato’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha paṇṇattisamatikkamāvasāneti kesādipaṇṇattisamatikkamavasena pavattāya bhāvanāya avasāne. Apubbāpariyamivāti ekajjhamiva. Kesāti iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, evamādinā iminā pakārena vāti attho. Te dhammāti vaṇṇādivasena vavatthāpitā paṭikkūlākārato upaṭṭhitā koṭṭhāsadhammā.
“于外亦”是指,于自身相续之外,即于他人的相续之身中。他“引摄作意”是指,引摄如前所述的厌恶作意。“如此,彼亦如此”意为:当所有部分已明显时,即如同于自己身中,于他人身中一切头发等部分,亦以厌恶的方式,以显著的状态现前。此处,这是开示了瑜伽行者类似于遍业处中增长的修习殊胜。显示巴利原文
Bahiddhāpīti sasantānato bahipi, parasantānakāyepīti attho. Manasikāraṃ upasaṃharatīti yathāvuttaṃ paṭikkūlamanasikāraṃ upaneti. Yathā idaṃ, tathā etanti. Evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesūti yathā attano kāye, evaṃ paresampi kāye sabbesu kesādikoṭṭhāsesu paṭikkūlavasena vibhūtabhāvena upaṭṭhitesūti attho. Ayamettha kasiṇesu vaḍḍhanasadiso yogino bhāvanāviseso dassito.
“次第舍离等”之“等”字,包含了依经藏方法所阐明的精进平等策励。当如所说的方法,于自己身中的头发等,持续地作意“厌恶、厌恶”时,当信等诸根变得得止、清净而转起时,那时,由于无信等的远离,得到七种正法所支持的、具有殊胜力量的寻等禅支,便更为敏锐地显现。因这些是那些障碍的直接对立,诸盖与其同处的恶法一起被镇伏。心依近行定而得定,他习行、修习、多作那相同的相,便证得安止。因此说“次第地生起安止”。“以一切行相”是指,依颜色等五种方式。“此”即是指那安止。显示巴利原文
Anupubbamuñcanādīti ādi-saddena suttantanayena vibhāvitaṃ vīriyasamatāyojanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Punappunaṃ manasi karototi vuttanayena attano kāye kesādike ‘‘paṭikkūlā paṭikkūlā’’ti abhiṇhaso manasikāraṃ pavattentassa yadā saddhādīni indriyāni laddhasamathāni visadāni pavattanti, tadā assaddhiyādīnaṃ dūrībhāvena sātisayaṃ balappattehi sattahi saddhammehi laddhūpatthambhāni vitakkādīni jhānaṅgāni paṭutarāni hutvā pātubhavanti. Tesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkatāya nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti saddhiṃ tadekaṭṭhehi pāpadhammehi. Upacārasamādhinā cittaṃ samādhiyati, so taṃyeva nimittaṃ āsevanto bhāvento bahulīkaronto appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anukkamena appanā uppajjatī’’ti. Sabbākāratoti vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhāpi. Sāti appanā.
然而,若此业处如无识不净业处那样,依初禅而成就,那为何还被称为“身至念”呢?因此说“如是依初禅之力”等。在种种颜色、形状等的三十二部分中,所转起的念,其作用于此尤为殊胜,故说“由念力成就故”。显示巴利原文
Yadi panetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ aviññāṇakāsubhakammaṭṭhānāni viya paṭhamajjhānavasena sijjhati, atha kasmā ‘‘kāyagatāsatī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘evaṃ paṭhamajjhānavasenā’’tiādi. Nānāvaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīsu dvattiṃsāya koṭṭhāsesu pavattamānāya satiyā kiccamettha sātisayanti āha ‘‘satibalena ijjhanato’’ti.
他能克服于边远卧坐处及殊胜善法中的不乐,也能克服于欲乐中的乐,故为“能忍不乐与乐者”,因思维身体自性已断除不欣喜故。同样,由于修习身分,对自己的爱恋已灭尽,故能忍怖畏恐惧,且成为能堪忍寒冷等触者。因为,人因对自己的爱恋而有怖畏恐惧,也不能忍受苦。然而,为了开示:随顺此身分修习者不仅只得初禅,更有向上的通达,故说“头发等”等语。显示巴利原文
Pantasenāsanesu, adhikusalesu ca aratiṃ, kāmaguṇesu ca ratiṃ sahati abhibhavatīti aratiratisaho sarīrasabhāvacintanena anabhiratiyā pahīnattā. Tathā koṭṭhāsabhāvanāya attasinehassa parikkhīṇattā bhayabheravaṃ sahati, sītādīnañca adhivāsakajātiko hoti. Attasinehavasena hi purisassa bhayabheravaṃ hoti, dukkhassa ca anadhivāsanaṃ. Imaṃ pana koṭṭhāsabhāvanamanuyuttassa na kevalaṃ paṭhamajjhānamattameva, uttaripi paṭivedho atthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘kesādīna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
入出息念论注释显示巴利原文
Ānāpānassatikathāvaṇṇanā
215 “如此赞叹之后,所开示的入出息念业处”——这是关联。其中,由于“如何修习”等提问句的含义一旦阐明,赞叹句的含义也已随之阐明,彼此无别,故略过赞叹,而以“如何修习”等开始。在此,有“此亦是”一语,这是其与前述赞叹不同的特出之处。为了显示其中并无赞叹,故说“如此赞叹后”。而彼处的赞叹,是为了令生欢喜以激发精进。因为,比丘们听闻此语后,心想:“世尊以众多行相赞叹此定,此定确实是寂静、殊胜、无杂染、安乐的住,且能如理地令诸恶法消失。”便生起欢喜,策励精进,认为应当恭敬地投入、付诸实践。而“此亦是”一词的涵义,应通过关联来理解:世尊以说法之力,将他自己现量所证的定,也令那些比丘们感到亲近、现前,并以总括的方式宣说:“我所开示的,作为渡入涅槃大湖之渡口的遍禅、不净禅等,并非仅有那些,此亦是。”显示巴利原文
215. Yaṃ taṃ evaṃ pasaṃsitvā ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ niddiṭṭhanti sambandho. Tattha yasmā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito’’tiādikāya pucchāpāḷiyā atthe vibhāvite thomanāpāḷiyāpi attho vibhāvitoyeva hoti bhedābhāvato, tasmā taṃ laṅghitvā ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito cā’’tiādinā ārabhati. Tattha hi ito pasaṃsābhāvo ‘‘ayampi kho’’ti vacanañca viseso. Tesu pasaṃsābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ pasaṃsitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pasaṃsā ca tattha abhirucijananena ussāhanatthā. Tañhi sutvā bhikkhū ‘‘bhagavā imaṃ samādhiṃ anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsati, santo kirāyaṃ samādhi paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro pāpadhamme ca ṭhānaso antaradhāpetī’’ti sañjātābhirucayo ussāhajātā sakkaccaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ maññanti. ‘‘Ayampi kho’’ti padassa ye ime mayā nibbānamahāsarassa otaraṇatitthabhūtā kasiṇajjhānaasubhajjhānādayo desitā, na kevalaṃ te eva, ayampi khoti bhagavā attano paccakkhabhūtaṃ samādhiṃ desanānubhāvena tesampi bhikkhūnaṃ āsannaṃ, paccakkhañca karonto sampiṇḍanavasena evamāhāti sambandhamukhena attho veditabbo.
“十六事”指:于四念处中,依四种四组而有十六处。“一切行相圆满”指:以业处巴利文的句义、总义、譬喻、问难、答覆、利益等一切行相而圆满。“详说”指:对业处的无余广说。显示巴利原文
Soḷasavatthukanti catūsu anupassanāsu catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbākāraparipūroti kammaṭṭhānapāḷiyā padattho piṇḍattho upamā codanā parihāro payojananti evamādīhi sabbehi ākārehi paripuṇṇo. Niddesoti kammaṭṭhānassa nissesato vitthāro.
216 “如何”一词,是显示提问方式的词句。此处的提问,是出于希望说法的意欲,而非别的原因。为了显示此义——该提问以纳入开示的一切殊胜种类为所缘——故说“如何……是意欲问”。在“如何多作”中,也应引出“入出息念定”一词来关联。这里,“如何”是希望以种种方式详细解说入出息念定之多作的意欲问。为了显示“多作的入出息念定”即是对所问之法的开示,故以“此即同理”来指摄。同样,为了显示其寂静性等也是由修习多作而成就的,提及它们即已被摄受,故说“如何多作……止息,此处亦同理”。显示巴利原文
216.Kathanti idaṃ pucchanākāravibhāvanapadaṃ. Pucchā cettha kathetukamyatāvasena aññāsaṃ asambhavato. Sā ca upari desanaṃ āruḷhānaṃ sabbesaṃ pakāravisesānaṃ āmasanavasenāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘kathanti…pe… kamyatāpucchā’’ti āha. Kathaṃ bahulīkatoti etthāpi ‘‘ānāpānassatisamādhī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tattha kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibahulīkāraṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bahulīkato ānāpānassatisamādhīti tathāpuṭṭhadhammanidassananti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati. Tathā santabhāvādayopi tassa yehi bhāvanābahulīkārehi siddhā, taggahaṇeneva gahitā hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘kathaṃ bahulīkato…pe… vūpasametīti etthāpi eseva nayo’’ti vuttaṃ.
“再者,优陀夷,我已为弟子们宣说了行道,依此行道的弟子们修习四念处”等(中部2.247)中,由生起与增长之义而说为“修习”。为显示此二义,故说“已修习者,即已令生起或已令增长”。其中,“已修习”指已令存在、从此处而去,即已令生起、仅得获得之义;而已生起者,是已得而习行;已修习者,是已令至熟练状态,即已增长之义。“执持入出息之身”指以长短等差别来限定而执持入出息,依彼而生起的念,即作为缘的念。前一种意义中,由相应之说而说定对念有俱生等缘的关系;后一种意义中,则亦有亲依止缘的关系。因为与近行定俱行的念,是安止定的亲依止缘。“已多修习”指已多次令生起,以此说明已达转向等自在的状态。因为已达自在者,可在任何想要的时刻入定,故能一再地生起,因此说“已一再地作”。正如在“就在此,比丘们,沙门”(中部1.139;增支部4.241)、“即离诸欲”(长部1.226;相应部2.152;增支部4.123)等中,第一句所说的eva字在第二句等中也已说,同样地,此处也说“应知由两处的eva字而有决定”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Puna ca paraṃ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṃ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāventī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.247) uppādanavaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanā vuccatīti tadubhayavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito vā’’ti āha. Tattha bhāvaṃ vijjamānataṃ ito gatoti bhāvito, uppādito paṭiladdhamattoti attho. Uppanno pana laddhāsevano, bhāvito paguṇabhāvaṃ āpādito, vaḍḍhitoti attho . Ānāpānapariggāhikāyāti dīgharassādivisesehi saddhiṃ assāsapassāse paricchijjagāhikāya, te ārabbha pavattāya, satiyaṃ paccayabhūtāyanti attho. Purimasmiñhi atthe samādhissa satiyā sahajātādipaccayabhāvo vutto sampayuttavacanato, dutiyasmiṃ pana upanissayabhāvopi. Upacārajjhānasahagatā hi sati appanāsamādhissa upanissayo hotīti. Bahulīkatoti bahulaṃ pavattito, tena āvajjanādivasībhāvappattimāha. Yo hi vasībhāvaṃ āpādito, so icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjitabbato punappunaṃ pavattīyati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ kato’’ti. Yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241), ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152; a. ni. 4.123) ca evamādīsu paṭhamapade vutto eva-saddo dutiyādīsupi vutto eva hoti, evamidhāpīti āha ‘‘ubhayattha evasaddena niyamo veditabbo’’ti. Ubhayapadaniyamena laddhaguṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
“不净业处”是指以不净为所缘的禅那。因为此禅那于不净中为瑜伽行之业处,也是瑜伽行者殊胜乐的原因,故称为“不净业处”。“唯”以此遮止所缘。“以通达故”指以禅那通达。因为禅那通过修习的差别而成就时,即正通达自己的境界而转起,且依自性而被通达,所以说“通达”。“因所缘粗故”指所缘可厌。“因所缘违逆故”指所缘应厌恶。“以方便”指以理趣,或以某种间接方式。“因所缘寂静故”指所缘达到应次第观察的极微细性。因为当所缘寂静、止息时,于中生起的法自身亦寂静止息,因此说“寂静、寂止、寂灭”,即一切热恼寂灭之义。由所缘寂静故,那些所缘诸法的寂静,应以世间法所缘的观察来阐明。显示巴利原文
Asubhakammaṭṭhānanti asubhārammaṇajhānamāha. Taṃ hi asubhesu yogakammabhāvato, yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato ca ‘‘asubhakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Kevala’’nti iminā ārammaṇaṃ nivatteti. Paṭivedhavasenāti jhānapaṭivedhavasena. Jhānañhi bhāvanāvisesena ijjhantaṃ attano visayaṃ paṭivijjhantameva pavattati, yathāsabhāvato paṭivijjhīyati cāti ‘‘paṭivedho’’ti vuccati. Oḷārikārammaṇattāti bībhacchārammaṇattā. Paṭikkūlārammaṇattāti jigucchitabbārammaṇattā. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena, lesantarena vā. Ārammaṇasantatāyāti anukkamena vicetabbataṃ pattaṃ ārammaṇassa paramasukhumataṃ sandhāyāha. Sante hi sannisinne ārammaṇe pavattamāno dhammo sayampi sannisinnova hoti. Tenāha ‘‘santo vūpasanto nibbuto’’ti, nibbutasabbapariḷāhoti attho. Ārammaṇasantatāya tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā.
没有任何灌注能带来其寂静、殊胜的状态,故为“无灌注”。因无灌注,故为“未被灌注”。正因未被灌注,故为“未混杂、未与遍作等相杂”。由此故为“各别、单独、唯一”。“不共、不共有”。所有这些都是为了显示其自性即寂静的状态而说。或者,遍作是寂静状态之因,而遍作指以生起相为终了的遍作等,此处无有此类,这是意旨所在。因为那时业处无味,可能是不寂静、不殊胜的。或者,此处无有由近行而来的寂静,这是连接。如同在近行刹那,由离盖、支的显现而有他人的寂静,此禅那则不然。而此禅那是初始即具足……殊胜的,这是连接。有些人,指上精舍住者而说。“未被灌注”指不由灌注而灌注。因此说“有威力”,即类似有威力之义。“甘美”指可爱,应知由三禅、四禅,或由舍的寂静状态而趣向乐故,能带来心乐;也由一切(禅那)而能带来心乐。但由禅那所生殊胜色所触之身的状态,能带来身乐,这应在出禅那时看待。在此立场,“于安止安止的刹那”应视为处格表因。“未镇伏”指未由禅那从自相续中驱除、未断除。“由不熟练所生”指不熟练即无明,由此所生。因为一切恶法皆以无……显示巴利原文
Nāssa santapaṇītabhāvāvahaṃ kiñci secananti asecanako. Asecanakattā anāsittako. Anāsittakattā eva abbokiṇṇo asammisso parikammādinā. Tato eva pāṭiyekko visuṃyeveko. Āveṇiko asādhāraṇo. Sabbametaṃ sarasato eva santabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Parikammaṃ vā santabhāvanimittaṃ, parikammanti ca kasiṇakaraṇādīni nimittuppādapariyosānaṃ, tādisaṃ idha natthīti adhippāyo. Tadā hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirassādattā asantamappaṇītaṃ siyā. Upacārena vā natthi ettha santatāti yojanā. Yathā upacārakkhaṇe nīvaraṇavigamena, aṅgapātubhāvena ca paresaṃ santatā hoti, na evamimassa. Ayaṃ pana ādisamannā…pe… paṇīto cāti yojanā. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsike sandhāyāha. Anāsittakoti upasecanena na āsittako. Tenāha ‘‘ojavanto’’ti, ojavantasadisoti attho. Madhūroti iṭṭho, cetasikasukhapaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ tikacatukkajjhānavasena, upekkhāya vā santabhāvena sukhagatikattā sabbesampi vasena veditabbaṃ. Jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭṭhasarīratāvasena pana kāyikasukhapaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tañca kho jhānato vuṭṭhitakāle. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘appitappitakkhaṇe’’ti idaṃ hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avikkhambhiteti jhānena sakasantānato anīhaṭe appahīne. Akosallasambhūteti akosallaṃ vuccati avijjā, tato sambhūte. Avijjāpubbaṅgamā hi sabbe pāpadhammā. Khaṇenevāti attano pavattikkhaṇeneva. Antaradhāpetīti ettha antaradhāpanaṃ vināsanaṃ, taṃ pana jhānakattukassa idhādhippetattā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vikkhambhetī’’ti. Vūpasametīti visesena upasameti. Visesena upasamanaṃ pana sammadeva upasamanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu upasametī’’ti.
难道其他定也不是于自己转起的刹那即令敌对法消失、寂止吗?那么为何唯独将此定如此特别地说?因为从前行阶段开始,即有种种寻的寂止。这确实已说:“应修习入出息念以断寻”(增支部9.1;优陀那31)。再者,这是利根、智最上者的业处,而智最上者的断烦恼较其他更为殊胜,如信解脱者与见至者相比。因此,针对此差别而说“彻底地令消失、寂止”。或者,由于相显现时,于刹那即有支的显现,故唯独此定被称为“彻底地令消失、寂止”。正如大非时云生起、降雨时,于刹那即令地上尘垢寂止。因此说:“诸比丘,譬如大非时云生起”等(相应部5.985;律藏巴拉基卡165)。教内者的禅那修习大多是顺决择分的,因此说“因是顺决择分”。而诸佛的则必定是顺决择分。因为修习此业处,一切正等觉者皆证得正等菩提。此定为圣道之基础,次第增长后,犹如已达圣道状态,因此说“次第达到圣道增长”。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca aññopi samādhi attano pavattikkhaṇeneva paṭipakkhadhamme antaradhāpeti vūpasameti, atha kasmā ayameva samādhi evaṃ visesetvā vuttoti? Pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya nānāvitakkavūpasamasabbhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1; udā. 31). Apica tikkhapaññassa ñāṇuttarassetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ñāṇuttarassa ca kilesappahānaṃ itarehi sātisayaṃ, yathā saddhādhimuttehi diṭṭhippattassa. Tasmā imaṃ visesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā nimittapātubhāve sati khaṇeneva aṅgapātubhāvasabbhāvato ayameva samādhi ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vutto. Yathā taṃ mahato akālameghassa uṭṭhitassa dhārānipāte khaṇeneva pathaviyaṃ rajojallassa vūpasamo. Tenāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāakālamegho uṭṭhito’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.985; pārā. 165). Sāsanikassa jhānabhāvanā yebhuyyena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hotīti āha ‘‘nibbedhabhāgiyattā’’ti. Buddhānaṃ pana ekaṃsena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hoti. Imameva hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā sabbepi sammāsambuddhā sammāsambodhiṃ adhigacchanti. Ariyamaggassa pādakabhūto ayaṃ samādhi anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā ariyamaggabhāvaṃ upagato viya hotīti āha ‘‘anupubbena ariyamaggavuddhippatto’’ti.
然而,此义理是依离欲、灭尽、舍遣之随观,方为真正契合。为便于理解前文以广说方式阐述的义理,便将其摄要而说:“此即此处之略义”,意谓总括之义。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panattho virāganirodhapaṭinissaggānupassanānaṃ vasena sammadeva yujjati. Heṭṭhā papañcavasena vuttamatthaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho’’ti āha, piṇḍatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
217 Tamatthaṃ(彼义)即指以“如何修习”等提问方式略述的义理。为了说明idha一词:在“此处,如来出现于世间”等句中,是就世间而言;在“即于此住立者”等句中,指处所;在“诸比丘,我于此已食、已饱满、已谢绝”等句中,仅为凑足文句;而在“此处,比丘学习法”等句中,则指教法;在“诸比丘,此处有比丘”中,亦指教法,故说“诸比丘,于此教法中,有比丘”,进而为令此义明了,便说“此即是”等。其中,“一切种类入出息念定之能生者”中的“一切种类”,是就十六种方式而言。因为这一切种类唯在此教法中才存在。外道虽有所知,但仅止于最初四种方式。故说“遮止他教有如此状态”,意为遮止如前所说之人依止他教。由此显示“诸比丘,此处”一语是有所包摄的。因为即使单个字也有简别之义,例如“食风者”。故又说“诸比丘,即在此处,有沙门”等。因为能生起一切种类入出息念定之法,即是圆满沙门性的法。“他论”指其他外道的种种论说及教门。显示巴利原文
217.Tamatthanti taṃ ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito’’tiādinā pucchāvasena saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ. ‘‘Idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.190; ma. ni. 1.291; a. ni. 3.61) idha-saddo lokaṃ upādāya vutto, ‘‘idheva tiṭṭhamānassā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.369) okāsaṃ, ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) padapūraṇamattaṃ, ‘‘idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pana sāsanaṃ, ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’ti idhāpi sāsanamevāti dassento ‘‘bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti vatvā tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ayañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassāti sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ soḷasa pakāre sandhāya. Te hi imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Bāhirakā hi jānantā ādito catuppakārameva jānanti. Tenāha ‘‘aññasāsanassa tathābhāvapaṭisedhano’’ti, yathāvuttassa puggalassa nissayabhāvapaṭisedhanoti attho. Etena ‘‘idha bhikkhave’’ti idaṃ antogadhevasaddanti dasseti. Santi hi ekapadānipi sāvadhāraṇāni yathā ‘‘vāyubhakkho’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇakaraṇadhammo hi so, yo sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakārā vādā titthāyatanāni.
为了说明阿兰若等住处正是与修习相适宜的住所,故说“对此”等。不易调伏、未得调伏的牛,名为恶牛。犹如乳房完全不流出乳汁那样,阻碍挤奶的母牛,名为恶乳牛。依于色声等而生起的乐味,称为色所缘等味。“先前所惯习的所缘”,指出家之前,或在无始轮回中熟习的所缘。显示巴利原文
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Yathā thanehi sabbaso khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Rūpasaddādike paṭicca uppajjanako assādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajjato pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ.
“Nibandheyya”(应系缚)意为应系缚。“以念”指正确生起、善能识别业处的念。“于所缘”指于业处所缘。“坚固”即稳定,意思是使其有力,如同具念者成就近行定与安止定那样,令其达到有力状态。显示巴利原文
Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānasallakkhaṇasampavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
“殊胜证得与现法乐住之基础”,即是一切诸佛、某些独觉佛及佛弟子的殊胜证得,也是依其他业处已证殊胜者的现法乐住之基础。显示巴利原文
Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ, ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ, buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa ceva aññakammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa ca padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ.
世尊如同宅舍明师,为瑜伽行者指示适宜的住处。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadisanato.
如豹的比丘,独居林中,以摧破敌对法而成就所愿之义。‘最上果’即指沙门果。‘精进力调适之地’:即成为修习精进力的调适基础。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekiko viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanena icchitatthasādhanato. Phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalamāha. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
218 ‘于如是所说之相’:即依阿毗达摩教法与契经教法所说之相。‘树近处’:即‘正午时分,树荫遍覆四周,无风时叶落之处,此范围即称为树下’——如是所说的树之近处。‘其余七种住处’:即山、岩窟、山洞、冢墓、林野、露地、草堆——如是所说。显示巴利原文
218.Evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesūti abhidhammapariyāyena (vibha. 530), suttantapariyāyena ca vuttalakkhaṇesu. Rukkhasamīpanti ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūlanti vuccatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ rukkhassa samīpaṭṭhānaṃ. Avasesasattavidhasenāsananti pabbataṃ kandaraṃ giriguhaṃ susānaṃ vanapatthaṃ abbhokāsaṃ palālapuñjanti evaṃ vuttaṃ.
‘随顺三季、随顺界与行’:即随顺热季等三季,随顺痰界等三界,随顺痴行等三行。如是,热季时阿兰若为随顺,冬季时树下为随顺,雨季时空屋为随顺;痰界、痰性者阿兰若为随顺,胆汁界者树下为随顺,风界者空屋为随顺;痴行者阿兰若为随顺,嗔行者树下为随顺,贪行者空屋为随顺。‘不属昏沉、不掉举之翼’:即不属萎靡与散乱之翼。卧属懈怠之翼,立与行属掉举之翼,而坐则不属此二,故为平静。为显示坐的坚固由于结跏趺坐,出入息运行的舒适由于上身正直安立,把握所缘的方便由于置念于面前,故如是说。‘缚膝坐’:即依膝下系缚而坐。下身的正直安立,仅由‘坐’一词即已表明,故‘身正直’中的‘身’字指上身,而说‘上身正直安立’。为从自相与作用显示此正直安立,故说‘十八’等。‘不俯’即不低垂。‘不散堕’即不离散、不越出路,由此前后相续,达于增长、增广。此处‘pari’前缀与‘abhi’前缀同义,故说‘面向业处’,意为遮止外多种所缘,唯以业处为前导。‘pari’为摄持义,如‘pariṇāyikā’(能导者)等中。‘出离’义为从敌对法出离。故显示巴利原文
Ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlanti gimhādiututtayassa, semhādidhātuttayassa, mohādicariyattayassa ca anukūlaṃ. Tathā hi gimhakāle ca araññaṃ anukūlaṃ, hemante rukkhamūlaṃ, vassakāle suññāgāraṃ, semhadhātukassa semhapakatikassa araññaṃ, pittadhātukassa rukkhamūlaṃ , vātadhātukassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ, mohacaritassa araññaṃ, dosacaritassa rukkhamūlaṃ, rāgacaritassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ. Alīnānuddhaccapakkhikanti asaṅkocāvikkhepapakkhikaṃ. Sayanañhi kosajjapakkhikaṃ, ṭhānacaṅkamanāni uddhaccapakkhikāni, na evaṃ nisajjā. Tato evassa santatā. Nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ pallaṅkābhujanena, assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ uparimakāyassa ujukaṭṭhapanena, ārammaṇapariggahūpāyaṃ parimukhaṃ satiyā ṭhapanena dassento. Ūrubaddhāsananti ūrūnamadhobandhanavasena nisajjā. Heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ nisajjā-vacaneneva bodhitanti ‘‘ujuṃ kāya’’nti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha ‘‘uparimasarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭṭhapanaṃ sarūpato, payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na onamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na vilaṅghati, tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesuppattiyā vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Idha pari-saddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhitvāti attho. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16) viya. Niyyānaṭṭho paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho. Tasmā pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ pariccattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.
219 “具念者”意为:具足正念、正在忆念而入息,即他的入息活动丝毫没有脱离正念。“具念者出息”中,亦应将“具念者出息”的“者”字引来而说。“念行者”指成为具念者之后,或以正念而作应作之事者,或具造作习性者。如果“具念者入息,具念者出息”于其分别中已作说明,那为何不说“入息出息”,而说“念行者”呢?这是为了使说法一味。因为在第一个四分组中,仅有两词依现在时出现,其余则依未来时。因此,为了使说法一味,于一切处都说为“念行者”。显示巴利原文
219.Satovāti satiyā samannāgato eva saranto eva assasati nāssa kāci sativirahitā assāsappavatti hotīti attho. Sato passasatīti etthāpi satova passasatīti eva-saddo ānetvā vattabbo. Satokārīti sato eva hutvā, satiyā eva vā kātabbassa kattā, karaṇasīlo vā. Yadi ‘‘satova assasati sato passasatī’’ti etassa vibhaṅge (ma. ni. 3.148; saṃ. ni. 5.986; pārā. 165) vuttaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘assasati passasati’’cceva avatvā ‘‘satokārī’’ti vuttaṃ? Ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya. Paṭhamacatukke padadvayameva hi vattamānakālavasena āgataṃ, itarāni anāgatakālavasena. Tasmā ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya sabbattha (paṭi. ma. 1.165 ādayo) ‘‘satokāri’’cceva vuttaṃ.
“以长入息”是省略了格语尾,而以“长入息”作说明;或者指依世尊所说的“长”而入息。“了知心的一境性、不散乱”:由于是散乱的对立面而得“不散乱”之名,了知心的独一境界。“念已现前”指已趣近所缘而安住。“以彼念、以彼智”指以如前所述的念,及以如前所述的智。这是说:对于以长入息为所缘而心不散乱者,或以不痴而了知者,其念即已现前;对于以作所缘或以不痴而正知者,其正知即依于念与正知而存在。具足此念与正知的瑜伽行者,即名为“念行者”。“以随观舍遣而入息”指成为随观舍遣者而入息。或读作“随观舍遣之入息”,其义为:彼随观舍遣者的入息即是随观舍遣之入息,依他们而入息。依律藏的方法,于内发起的呼吸为入息,于外发起的呼吸为出息。依经藏的方法,即使外出后于内的呼吸亦为入息,即使内发后于外的呼吸亦为出息。此即正理——显示巴利原文
Dīghaṃassāsavasenāti dīghaassāsavasena vibhattialopaṃ katvā niddeso. Dīghanti vā bhagavatā vuttaassāsavasena. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepanti vikkhepassa paṭipakkhabhāvato ‘‘avikkhepo’’ti laddhanāmacittassa ekaggabhāvaṃ pajānato. Sati upaṭṭhitā hotīti ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇenāti yathāvuttāya satiyā, yathāvuttena ca ñāṇena. Idaṃ vutta hoti – dīghaṃ assāsaṃ ārammaṇabhūtaṃ avikkhittacittassa, asammohato vā pajānantassa tattha sati upaṭṭhitā eva hoti, taṃ sampajānantassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena, asammohavasena vā sampajaññaṃ, tadadhīnasatisampajaññena taṃsamaṅgī yogāvacaro satokārī nāma hotīti. Paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasenāti paṭinissaggānupassī hutvā assasanassa vasena. ‘‘Paṭinissaggānupassīassāsavasenā’’ti vā pāṭho. Tassa paṭinissaggānupassino assāsā paṭinissaggānupassīassāsā, tesaṃ vasenāti attho. Vinayanayena anto uṭṭhitasasanaṃ assāso, bahi uṭṭhitasasanaṃ passāso. Suttantanayena pana bahi uṭṭhahitvāpi anto sasanato assāso, anto uṭṭhahitvāpi bahi sasanato passāso. Ayameva ca nayo –
“以念随行入息之初中后,因内心向外散乱,身与心皆成躁动、动摇与颤动”;“以念随行出息之初中后,因心向外散乱,身与心皆成躁动、动摇与颤动”——显示巴利原文
‘‘Assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti, ‘‘passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157) –
与此巴利经文相符。显示巴利原文
Imāya pāḷiyā sameti.
他们说:内在之风先向外逸出,因此依生起的次第,入息被先说。“触及上颚而息灭”意为触及上颚而止息。据说,正因为如此,刚出生的婴儿会打喷嚏。“如是乃至”等,是对前说义趣的总结。有些人说:“‘如是乃至’,以此生起的次第而言,入息应理解为向外逸出之风,这是其意趣。”显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ abbhantaravāto bahi nikkhamati, tasmā pavattikkamena assāso paṭhamaṃ vuttoti vadanti. Tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyatīti tāluṃ āhacca nirujjhati. Tena kira sampatijāto bāladārako khipitaṃ karoti. Evaṃ tāvātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa nigamanaṃ. Keci ‘‘evaṃ tāvāti anena pavattikkamena assāso bahinikkhamanavātoti gahetabbanti adhippāyo’’ti vadanti.
“依长时”指依时间上的长时。此“长时”一词,既可指时间,亦可指处所。在此,先以处所长时为例,复依时间的长时阐明入出息的长短,故说“正如”等句。其中,“处所长时”指作为处所的长时。“遍满”即周遍。“粉碎”指因众多聚团而被粉碎。“长时”即长的处所。是故,由缓慢地转起而有长的相续,故称为“长”。当知于此,象等之身与狗等之身中,入出息的长短是依时间的长时而说,非依处所长时的差别而说。因为(经文)说:“缓慢地充满后,缓慢地逸出”,“迅速地充满后,迅速地逸出”。“于人中”指即使在同等量的人身中。“长入息”指长入息相续转起;出息于此理亦然。如狗、兔等,入息与出息为短,如此相续。这些长与短的入出息,应视为那些众生的身本性。“他们”指众生。“它们”指入出息。“短时”指短暂的时间。显示巴利原文
Addhānavasenāti kāladdhānavasena. Ayaṃ hi addhāna-saddo kālassa, desassa ca vācako. Tattha desaddhānaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena dassetvā kāladdhānavasena assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha okāsaddhānanti okāsabhūtaṃ addhānaṃ. Pharitvāti byāpetvā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi anekakalāpabhāvena. Dīghaṃ addhānanti dīghaṃ padesaṃ. Tasmāti saṇikaṃ pavattiyā dīghasantānatāya ‘‘dīghā’’ti vuccanti. Ettha ca hatthiādisarīre, sunakhādisarīre ca assāsapassāsānaṃ desaddhānavisiṭṭhena kāladdhānavaseneva dīgharassatā vuttāti veditabbā. ‘‘Saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti’’, ‘‘sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamantī’’ti ca vacanato. Manussesūti samānappamāṇesupi manussasarīresu. Dīghaṃ assasantīti dīghaṃ assāsappabandhaṃ pavattentīti attho. Passasantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ assasanti ca passasanti cāti yojanā. Idaṃ pana dīghaṃ, rassañca assasanaṃ, passasanañca tesaṃ sattānaṃ sarīrasabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesanti sattānaṃ. Teti assāsapassāsā. Ittaramaddhānanti appakaṃ kālaṃ.
“以九种行相”是指:对于那些精勤修习而入息出息前后尚未获得殊胜者,最初仅依时间长短而说的三种行相,并且这三种行相是依三种人而说:有人善能如实标注长入息,有人善能如实标注长出息,有人善能如实标注此两者。然而,有些人说:“‘入息者、出息者’合为一语,是为了显示修习无间断地转起。”如前所说,依欲愿有三种;同样,依喜悦等,以此共有九种行相。显示巴利原文
Navahākārehīti bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa pubbenāparaṃ aladdhavisesassa kevalaṃ addhānavasena ādito vuttā tayo ākārā, te ca kho ekacco assāsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkheti, ekacco passāsaṃ, ekacco tadubhayanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena. Keci pana ‘‘assasatipi passasatipīti ekajjhaṃ vacanaṃ bhāvanāya nirantaraṃ pavattidassanattha’’nti vadanti. Chandavasena pubbe viya tayo, tathā pāmojjavasenāti imehi navahākārehi.
虽然在此,单一个人可能只得三种行相,但由于依传承,一切行相皆已载入圣典,且应依这些人而作遍作,故说“于此,彼比丘以九种行相”。“如是了知者”即指如是以所述行相了知入出息、于此作意者。“以一种行相”是指在长入息等四种行相中的一种行相,或于九种、三种中的一种。如此,将说:显示巴利原文
Kāmaṃ cettha ekassa puggalassa tayo eva ākārā labbhanti, tantivasena pana sabbesaṃ pāḷiāruḷhattā, tesaṃ vasena parikammassa kātabbattā ca ‘‘tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu navahākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pajānatoti evaṃ yathāvuttehi ākārehi assāsapassāse pajānato, tattha manasikāraṃ pavattentassa. Ekenākārenāti dīghaṃ assāsādīsu catūsu ākāresu ekena ākārena, navasu tīsu vā ekena. Tathā hi vakkhati –
“入息有长亦有短,出息其相亦复然;
于比丘鼻端,四种相转起。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso, passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti, nāsikagge va bhikkhuno’’ti.
此修习即是入出息身随观,故说“身随观念处修习成就”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ bhāvanā assāsapassāsakāyānupassanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatī’’ti.
现在,为纯粹依据巴利语显示那九种行相及修习方法,而展开了“如所说”等文句。其中,“如何了知?”是为了说明了知方法而提出的问题。“长入息”是指具有所述特征的长的入息。“称为长时间”是指在被称为“长时间”的长时段中,即长刹那的意思。或者,“称为”一词如同“称为偷盗”等处那样,是部分、类别的同义词,因此“称为长时间”意为长时间的部分、区域部分。“意欲生起”是指由于修习带来前后的差别殊胜,在那里获得了滋味,从而生起了以特别想要作为特征的善法意欲。“以意欲之力”是指:以如此转起的意欲之力,对于特别精勤修习者,其业处得以增长、增广。“从此更微细”是指比前述意欲转起之前更为微细。因为藉由修习之力,身体的躁动与热恼被止息,入出息变得更为微细而转起。“喜悦生起”是指:由于入出息更微细,所缘更为寂静,以及业处进入行道,与修习心俱行的、分为小喜等类别的柔软喜便生起。“心回转”是指:有人说,由于入出息逐渐达到极度微细而不现起,当达到应被分别的状态时,心便回转。然而,由于修习之力,当入出息达到更微细时,在那里生起似相,显示巴利原文
Idāni pāḷivaseneva te nava ākāre, bhāvanāvidhiñca dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kathaṃ pajānātīti pajānanavidhiṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchati. Dīghaṃ assāsanti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ. Addhānasaṅkhāteti ‘‘addhāna’’nti saṅkhaṃ gate dīghe kāle, dīghaṃ khaṇanti attho. Koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhāta-saddo ‘‘theyyasaṅkhāta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 91) viya, tasmā addhānasaṅkhāteti addhānakoṭṭhāse, desabhāgeti attho. Chando uppajjatīti bhāvanāya pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahantiyā laddhassādattā tattha sātisayo kattukāmatālakkhaṇo kusalacchando uppajjati. Chandavasenāti tathāpavattachandassa vasena savisesaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuddhiṃ phātiṃ gamentassa. Tato sukhumataranti yathāvuttachandappavattiyā purimato sukhumataraṃ. Bhāvanābalena hi paṭippassaddhadarathapariḷāhatāya kāyassa assāsapassāsā sukhumatarā hutvā pavattanti. Pāmojjaṃ uppajjatīti assāsapassāsānaṃ sukhumatarabhāvena ārammaṇassa santataratāya, kammaṭṭhānassa ca vīthipaṭipannatāya bhāvanācittasahagato pamodo khuddikādibhedā taruṇapīti uppajjati. Cittaṃ vivattatīti anukkamena assāsapassāsānaṃ ativiya sukhumatarabhāvappattiyā anupaṭṭhahane vicetabbākārappattehi cittaṃ vinivattatīti keci. Bhāvanābalena pana sukhumatarabhāvappattesu assāsapassāsesu tattha paṭibhāganimitte uppanne pakatiassāsapassāsato cittaṃ nivattati. Upekkhā saṇṭhātīti tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte upacārappanābhede samādhimhi uppanne puna jhānanibbattanatthaṃ byāpārābhāvato ajjhupekkhanaṃ hotīti. Sā panāyaṃ upekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhāti veditabbā.
“以这九种行相”是指以这些如上所说的九种方式而转起。“长入出息身”是指具有长形相的入出息,即使被粉碎,也依集合义而称为身。此处,依于入出息而生起的似相,也随入出息而得名。“念的现起”是指念到达所缘而安住,故名为现起。“随观智”是指以奢摩他方式对似相的随观,以及以毗婆舍那方式,将入出息及其所依身确定为“色”、将心及与之相应法确定为“非色”,从而对名色随观的智,即是对此处的如实觉了。“身是现起处”意为:那个身作为所缘,念到达那里而安住,故名为现起处。而且,此处以“身是现起处”一语,也包含了其他身,因为这里也欲取如上所说的遍作行。“非念”是指那个身不称为念。而念既是现起处,也是念,具足忆念之义与安住之义。“以彼念”是指以如上所说的念。“以彼智”是指以如上所说的智。“彼身”是指彼入出息身及彼所依的色身。“随观”是指以与禅那相应的智及以毗婆舍那智随随观察。因此,这称为“于身修习身随观念处”,即以此随观,于如上所说的身,这便称为身随观念处的修习。显示巴利原文
Imehi navahi ākārehīti imehi yathāvuttehi navahi pakārehi pavattā. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyoti dīghākārā assāsapassāsā cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi samūhaṭṭhena kāyo. Assāsapassāse nissāya uppannanimittampettha assāsapassāsasamaññameva vuttaṃ. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti sati upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Anupassanāñāṇanti samathavasena nimittassa anupassanā, vipassanāvasena assāsapassāse, tannissayañca kāyaṃ ‘‘rūpa’’nti, cittaṃ taṃsampayuttadhamme ca ‘‘arūpa’’nti vavatthapetvā nāmarūpassa anupassanā ca ñāṇaṃ, tattha yathābhūtāvabodho. Kāyo upaṭṭhānanti so kāyo ārammaṇakaraṇavasena upagantvā sati ettha tiṭṭhatīti upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhāna’’nti iminā itarakāyassāpi saṅgaho hoti yathāvuttasammasanacārassāpi idha icchitattā. No satīti so kāyo sati nāma na hoti. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca saraṇaṭṭhena, upatiṭṭhanaṭṭhena ca. Tāya satiyāti yathāvuttāya satiyā. Tena ñāṇenāti yathāvutteneva ñāṇena. Taṃ kāyanti taṃ assāsapassāsakāyañceva tannissayarūpakāyañca. Anupassatīti jhānasampayuttañāṇena ceva vipassanāñāṇena ca anu anu passati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti tena anupassanena yathāvutte kāye ayaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti vuccati.
这是说:对于如上所说的入出息身以及作为其依处的业生身,唯是对身的随观,就如同对没有水的阳焰作水的随观一样,并非对无常等自性的身作常等自性的随观,而是如理地唯对无常、苦、无我、不净的自性作随观。或者,由于在身中没有任何可执取为“我”、“我所”、“女人”、“男人”的事物,因此不那样随观,而唯对身本身作随观,即是身随观。与那身随观相应的念,即是现起处,也就是念处。修习、增长它,便是身随观念处的修习。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā ayaṃ yathāvutte assāsapassāsakāye, tassa nissayabhūte karajakāye ca kāyasseva anupassanā anudakabhūtāya marīciyā udakānupassanā viya na aniccādisabhāve kāye niccādibhāvānupassanā, atha kho yathārahaṃ aniccadukkhānattāsubhabhāvassevānupassanā. Atha vā kāye ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā gahetabbassa kassaci abhāvato tādisaṃ ananupassitvā kāyamattasseva anupassanā kāyānupassanā, tāya kāyānupassanāya sampayuttā satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti.
“此理趣”是指将“以九种行相”等所阐明的方法,类推应用于短息的部分。“在此”是指在如上所示的“如何长入息”等所传承的巴利教法中。“于此”则是指在此以短息部分传承的巴利教法中。显示巴利原文
Esa nayoti ‘‘navahi ākārehī’’tiādinā vuttavidhiṃ rassa-pade atidisati. Etthāti etasmiṃ yathādassite ‘‘kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.148; saṃ. ni. 5.986; pārā. 165) āgate pāḷinaye. Idhāti imasmiṃ rassapadavasena āgate pāḷinaye.
“此”指瑜伽行者。“以长时间之力”即依长时间之力。“以短时之力”即依短少时间之力。“以这些行相”即以此九种行相。显示巴利原文
Ayanti yogāvacaro. Addhānavasenāti dīghakālavasena. Ittaravasenāti parittakālavasena. Imehi ākārehīti imehi navahi ākārehi.
“那样的”是指长的和短的。“四种颜色”是指四种行相,它们即是长等。“在鼻端,比丘”是为了偈颂结缚的方便而将“在鼻端”作简略说,“或”字是不确定的意思,以此包含了上唇。显示巴利原文
Tādisoti dīgho, rasso ca. Cattāro vaṇṇāti cattāro ākārā, te ca dīghādayo eva. Nāsikagge va bhikkhunoti gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘nāsikagge vā’’ti, vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena uttaroṭṭhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
220 “全身觉知者”:指对全身各个部分逐一地、正确地具有感受的习惯、了知的习惯;或者,他对各个部分逐一地、正确地有觉受,或者他逐一地、正确地正在觉知那个(全身)。在此,“一切”的摄取,虽然已成就对入息等所依身的无余遍取,但由于(身)是众多聚(色聚)的集合体,为了显示对其所有部分的觉知,而摄取“paṭi(各个、逐一)”一词。在此,为了显示恭敬、认真行持的状态,而摄取“saṃ(正确地、完全地)”一词。为了显示此义,而说“整个的”等。在此,应知:如同在入出息中,为了显示瑜伽行者于修习方式上,即使(入出息)相同,也应逐一地、认真地修习,而作了分别的教导;同样地,为了阐明此义,虽然意义相同,也以“整个的”等对两个词分别作了义释。令明显:即令显著,彻底地明了之义。令明显即明了,在那里不迷惑,是由于以智令它们(入出息)转起而成就的。为了显示此义,而说“如此令了知”等。在那里,“因此”:因为是以与智相应的心令入出息转起,而非以与智不相应的心,所以,这样的“全身觉知者”,被称为“我当觉知全身而入息,我当觉知全身而出息,如此修学”,这是佛陀等所说的,应如此连接。碎、细碎、散:由于众多聚的状态,以碎、细碎的状态而散在。开始变得明显:由于念与智的力量,以及先前如此造作(努力)的转起。应成为那样的:应成为与第四种人相似的状态,意思是:更不必说,在令念与智现前之后,于三处都应令与智相应的心转起。显示巴利原文
220.Sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedīti sabbassa kāyassa paṭi paṭi paccekaṃ sammadeva vedanasīlo jānanasīlo, tassa vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedamānoti attho. Tattha tattha sabba-ggahaṇena assāsādikāyassa anavasesapariyādāne siddhepi anekakalāpasamudāyabhāvato tassa sabbesampi bhāgānaṃ saṃvedanadassanatthaṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ. Tattha sakkaccakārībhāvadassanatthaṃ saṃ-saddaggahaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā samānepi assāsapassāsesu yogino paṭipattividhāne paccekaṃ sakkaccaṃyeva paṭipajjitabbanti dassetuṃ visuṃ desanā katā, evaṃ tamevatthaṃ dīpetuṃ satipi atthassa samānatāya ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādinā padadvayassa visuṃ visuṃ atthavaṇṇanā katāti veditabbaṃ. Pākaṭaṃ karontoti vibhūtaṃ karonto, sabbaso vibhāventoti attho. Pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ vibhāvanaṃ tattha asammuyhanaṃ ñāṇeneva nesaṃ pavattanena hotīti dassento ‘‘evaṃ viditaṃ karonto’’tiādimāha. Tattha tasmāti yasmā ñāṇasampayuttacitteneva assāsapassāse pavatteti, na vippayuttacittena, tasmā evaṃbhūto sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti vuccati buddhādīhīti yojanā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭeti anekakalāpatāya cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhāvena visaṭe. Ādi pākaṭo hoti satiyā, ñāṇassa ca vasena tathā pubbābhisaṅkhārassa pavattattā. Tādisena bhavitabbanti catutthapuggalasadisena bhavitabbaṃ, pageva satiṃ, ñāṇañca paccupaṭṭhapetvā tīsupi ṭhānesu ñāṇasampayuttameva cittaṃ pavattetabbanti adhippāyo.
“如此”:即以所说方式,依全身而觉知。“努力”:即精勤。“策励”:即作精进,令作意现起之义。这是指那位修习入出息念的人。“防护”:即念或精进。“以彼念”:即依于入出息而生起的念,以此念。“以彼作意”:即那以念为先导的修习作意,与之相应,这是意旨。“修习”:在说“三学”时,即修习增上善法。因为在此,那修习即被称为“学”。显示巴利原文
Evanti vuttappakārena sabbakāyapaṭisaṃvedanavaseneva. Ghaṭatīti ussahati. Vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ karoti, manasikāraṃ pavattetīti attho. Tathābhūtassāti ānāpānassatiṃ bhāventassa. Saṃvaroti sati , vīriyampi vā. Tāya satiyāti yā ānāpāne ārabbha pavattā sati, tāya. Tena manasikārenāti yo so tattha satipubbaṅgamo bhāvanāmanasikāro, tena saddhinti adhippāyo. Āsevatīti ‘‘tisso sikkhāyo’’ti vutte adhikusaladhamme āsevati. Tadāsevanañhettha sikkhananti adhippetaṃ.
“前一种方法”:指前一种修习方法,即最初的两个所缘(阶段)。在那阶段,由于如实了知入出息的长短状态,确实能生起智,但那并不困难,因为只是如其转起地把握它们而已,因此在那里用了现在时的表达。然而,后一种方法却很困难,犹如人行走在刀刃之上。因此,为了显示在此应以更殊胜的先前努力,而用了未来时的表达。为了显示此义,而说“在那里,因为……”等。在那里,“生起智等”:“等”字包含了身行轻安、觉知喜等。然而,有些人在这里说:“这是防护与受持的包含。”显示巴利原文
Purimanayeti purimasmiṃ bhāvanānaye, paṭhamavatthudvayeti adhippāyo. Tatthāpi kāmaṃ ñāṇuppādanaṃ labbhateva assāsapassāsānaṃ yāthāvato dīgharassabhāvāvabodhasabbhāvato, tathāpi taṃ na dukkaraṃ yathāpavattānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇamattabhāvatoti tattha vattamānakālappayogo kato. Idaṃ pana dukkaraṃ purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ gamanasadisaṃ, tasmā sātisayenettha pubbābhisaṅkhārena bhavitabbanti dīpetuṃ anāgatakālappayogo katoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ñāṇuppādanādīsūti ādi-saddena kāyasaṅkhārapassambhanapītipaṭisaṃvedanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci panettha ‘‘saṃvarasamādānānaṃ saṅgaho’’ti vadanti.
“身行”:即入息出息。它虽是心所生,但由于系属于业生身而转起,因此被它(业生身)所造作,故称为身行。然而,如“身行、语行”(中部1.102)这样所说的、以思为相的身行,虽然也存在于其他门(语门、意门)的转起中,但以多转起、常转起于身门而被标示,它在这里不是所意指的。在“令轻安”等中,后后的词是前前词的同义语,因此,轻安即止息。而且,应知:当那样努力时,若无有(努力),本应生起的粗的身行,由于努力成就而不生起。在那里:即在“令粗的身行轻安”这一句中。未摄持时:即业处未开始之时,因此,身与心也未被摄持时。因为“结跏趺坐,端正身体,置念于面前”这句中,以“端正身体”说身摄持,以“置念于面前”说心摄持。因此说:“身与心都被摄持了”。身:即业生身。有不安:即有热恼。而且,它们的有不安状态,如同粗重性一样,与粗的状态不相离,因此说“粗的”。更强:即有力量的、粗的。成为寂静:即心首先由于无外散乱而成为一境,摄持业处而转起,成为寂静、止息;由此,彼心生起的色法达到轻、软、适业的状态;由于与之随顺,其余的三相续色也是如此。如此,当心与身止息而转起时,依止于它们的入出息,其寂静的自性,次第地成为更细、更微妙而转起。因此说:“然而,当他的身也……”等。显示巴利原文
Kāyasaṅkhāranti assāsapassāsaṃ. So hi cittasamuṭṭhānopi samāno karajakāyappaṭibaddhavuttitāya tena saṅkharīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāroti vuccati. Yo pana ‘‘kāyasaṅkhāro vacīsaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.102) evamāgato kāyasaṅkhāro cetanālakkhaṇo satipi dvārantaruppattiyaṃ yebhuyyavuttiyā, tabbahulavuttiyā ca kāyadvārena lakkhito, so idha nādhippeto. Passambhentotiādīsu pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ padaṃ purimassa purimassa atthavacanaṃ, tasmā passambhanaṃ nāma vūpasamanaṃ, tañca tathāpayoge asati uppajjanārahassa oḷārikassa kāyasaṅkhārassa payogasampattiyā anuppādananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tatrāti ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento’’ti ettha. Apariggahitakāleti kammaṭṭhānassa anāraddhakāle, tato eva kāyacittānampi apariggahitakāle. ‘‘Nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyā’’ti hi iminā kāyapariggaho, ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā cittapariggaho vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā hontī’’ti. Kāyoti karajakāyo. Sadarathāti sapariḷāhā, sā ca nesaṃ sadarathatā garubhāvena viya oḷārikatāya avinābhāvinīti āha ‘‘oḷārikā’’ti. Balavatarāti sabalā thūlā. Santā hontīti cittaṃ tāvaṃ bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvena ekaggaṃ hutvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā pavattamānaṃ santaṃ hoti vūpasantaṃ, tato eva taṃsamuṭṭhānā rūpadhammā lahumudukammaññabhāvappattā, tadanuguṇatāya sesaṃ tisantatirūpanti evaṃ citte, kāye ca vūpasante pavattamāne tannissitā assāsapassāsā santasabhāvā anukkamena sukhumatarasukhumatamā hutvā pavattanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadā panassa kāyopī’’tiādi.
转向(ābhujanaṃ):即倾注(ābhogo),是‘我当令轻安’的初次转向。正确地、一再一再地执持:即等持(samannāhāro),是在同一所缘上相续转起的转向。对同一所缘作意、置于心中:即作意(manasikāro)。审察:即观察(paccavekkhaṇā)。显示巴利原文
Ābhujanaṃ ābhogo, ‘‘passambhemī’’ti paṭhamāvajjanā. Sammā anu anu āharaṇaṃ samannāhāro, tasmiṃyeva atthe aparāparaṃ pavattaāvajjanā. Tasseva atthassa manasi karaṇaṃ citte ṭhapanaṃ manasikāro. Vīmaṃsā paccavekkhaṇā.
“有不安的”:即有热恼的、有燃烧的。“强的”:即有力的、粗的。这是以性别的颠倒而说。因为所意指的实际上是“身行”。或者,“成为强的而转起”是动作的差别(状语)。“微细的”:这里也是同样的道理。“于身”:这里应引入“于心”而连接。显示巴利原文
Sāraddheti sadarathe sapariḷāhe. Adhimattanti balavaṃ oḷārikaṃ. Liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ. Kāyasaṅkhāroti hi adhippeto. ‘‘Adhimattaṃ hutvā pavattatī’’ti kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā etaṃ. Sukhumanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāyamhīti ettha ‘‘citte cā’’ti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
221 从初禅出起后,为第二禅所作的各种转向之遍作,如同初禅一样,因其远遣敌对法故,由彼所生的身行在初禅与第二禅近行中被称为粗重,这是就相似而言。此理同样适用于其余两种近行。或者,对于为证得第二禅等而修习者,因苦行道等而疲乏的瑜伽行者,由于身体疲倦、心受损等,以及由于寻等扰动而心现动摇的状态,在第二禅等的近行中,应知身行是粗重的。极微细者,是指在别处所得的身行,于第四禅中超越了微细。在那里,它连微细性都没有,何况粗重性?因为它已不转起。因此说‘达到了完全不转起’。显示巴利原文
221. Paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya kariyamānaṃ dutiyajjhānassa nānāvajjanaṃ parikammaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ viya dūrasamussāritapaṭipakkhanti katvā taṃsamuṭṭhāno kāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷārikoti sadiso vutto. Esa nayo sesūpacāradvayepi. Atha vā dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya paṭipajjato dukkhāpaṭipadādivasena kilamato yogino kāyakilamathacittūpaghātādivasena, vitakkādisaṅkhobhena ca sapariphandatāya cittappavattiyā dutiyajjhānādiupacāresu kāyasaṅkhārassa oḷārikatā veditabbā. Atisukhumoti aññattha labbhamāno kāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne atikkantasukhumo. Sukhumabhāvopissa tattha natthi, kuto oḷārikatā appavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘appavattimeva pāpuṇātī’’ti.
中部诵者考虑到证得禅定者次第入定之时,或于一座中即获得一切禅那,从而主张:从下下禅那至上上禅那的近行中,身行更为微细。因为在此情况下,有近行的诸禅那上上具有殊胜性与寂静性,这是可能的;或者,这是就一种转向的近行而说的。如此,由于所缘境不同,此说与前文所述之论并无矛盾。“一切”即指此两者。因为他们全都依所说的方法而欲求轻安。“在未把握时转起的身行,于把握时止息”,这是就相续相似而说的。因为那些粗重的入出息等并非本身变成微细,然而它们止息的方式如前文所述。显示巴利原文
Lābhissa sato anupubbasamāpattisamāpajjanavelaṃ, ekāsaneneva vā sabbesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṭilābhaṃ sandhāya majjhimabhāṇakā heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Tattha hi sopacārānaṃ jhānānaṃ uparūpari visesavantatā, santatā ca sambhaveyya, ekāvajjanūpacāraṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi heṭṭhā vuttavādena imassa vādassa avirodho siddho bhinnavisayattā. Sabbesaññevāti ubhayesampi. Yasmā te sabbepi vuccamānena vidhinā passaddhimicchantiyeva. ‘‘Apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhatī’’ti idaṃ sadisasantānatāya vuttaṃ. Na hi te eva oḷārikā assāsādayo sukhumā honti. Passambhanākāro pana nesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
“于把握四大时微细”,是就通过四界差别门而专注于观而言的。“于把握一切色时微细”,是由于修习上上更为殊胜。因此他说:“于把握色与非色时微细”。“以相为所缘的观”,是指对色聚的思惟。从厌随观开始是强观,在此之前是弱观。依前文所说之理,即依“于未把握时”等奢摩他理趣中所说之理,在观理趣中亦应配合止息,如说:“于未把握时转起的身行,于把握四大时止息”等。显示巴利原文
Mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumoti catudhātumukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo bhāvanāya uparūpari paṇītabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo’’ti. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāti kalāpasammasanamāha. Nibbidānupassanato paṭṭhāya balavavipassanā. Tato oraṃ dubbalavipassanā. Pubbe vuttanayenāti ‘‘apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā samathanaye vuttena nayena ‘‘apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro mahābhūtapariggahe paṭippassambhatī’’tiādinā vipassanānayepi paṭippassaddhi yojetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Assāti”是指“passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ”这一句。“以诘问与澄清”,是指以追问与回辩。“如此”,是指现在将要说明的方式。显示巴利原文
Assāti imassa ‘‘passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti padassa. Codanāsodhanāhīti anuyogaparihārehi. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena.
所谓“如何”,是指为了说明《无碍解道》中所说“止息……学习”的这段内容——即,此身行的止息与瑜伽行者的学习,究竟是以何种方式、如何进行的——而提出此问。接着,为了从自相、粗细、寂止,以及修习与退失等方面来阐明身行,便开始了“什么是身行”等的开示。其中,“属于身”是指存在于色身之中的;“系属于身”是指依止于身的。当身存在时,它们便存在;当身不存在时,它们便不存在。因此,它们即便并非从身所生,却也由身所造作,故称为身行。“止息”,是指使粗重的身行得到息灭。其余两句是它的同义词。因为,使那粗重、未得寂静的本质沉没,称为“止息”;令其达到不再生起的寂灭状态,称为“灭”;将之善巧地导入寂静的本质,称为“寂止”。显示巴利原文
Kathanti yaṃ idaṃ ‘‘passambhayaṃ…pe… sikkhatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.171) vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ kena pakārena kāyasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ, yogino ca sikkhanaṃ hotīti kathetukamyatāya pucchitvā kāyasaṅkhāre sarūpato, oḷārikasukhumato, vūpasamato, anuyogaparihārato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘katame kāyasaṅkhārā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kāyikāti rūpakāye bhavā. Kāyapaṭibaddhāti kāyasannissitā. Kāye sati honti, asati na honti, tato eva te akāyasamuṭṭhānāpi kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Passambhentoti oḷārikoḷārikaṃ passambhento. Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Oḷārikañhi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ avūpasantasabhāvaṃ sannisīdāpento ‘‘passambhento’’ti vuccati, anuppādanirodhaṃ pāpento ‘‘nirodhento’’ti, suṭṭhu santasabhāvaṃ nayanto ‘‘vūpasamento’’ti.
“如某种样貌”,是指如同那样的样貌。“以身行”,是指以粗重的身行。“前屈”,是指身体面向前方的弯曲。“侧屈”,是指分别向两侧观看时的弯曲。“全屈”,是指向一切方向的弯曲,或说是一种善巧而全面的弯曲。“后屈”,是指朝向身后的弯曲。而“动”等词,是“前屈”等的同义词;或者说,较为强烈、面朝前方的移动等,称为前屈等;较为微弱、面朝前方的移动等,则称为动等。“止息身行”,是指止息作为这些前屈等动作之原因的粗重身行。因为,当那些粗重的身行止息时,前屈等动作也就随之止息了。显示巴利原文
Yathārūpehīti yādisehi. Kāyasaṅkhārehīti oḷārikehi kāyasaṅkhārehi. Ānamanāti abhimukhabhāvena kāyassa namanā. Vinamanāti visuṃ visuṃ passato namanā. Sannamanāti sabbato, suṭṭhu vā namanā. Paṇamanāti pacchato namanā. Iñjanādīni ānamanādīnaṃ vevacanāni, adhimattāni vā abhimukhaṃ calanādīni ānamanādayo, mandāni iñjanādayo. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti tathārūpaṃ ānamanādīnaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento. Tasmiṃ hi passambhite ānamanādayopi passambhitā eva honti.
所谓“寂静、微细”,是指如此样貌的身行:那类作为身体不再散乱之因的身行,其中不存在前屈等动作,由于没有不安而称为“寂静”,由于不再粗重而称为“微细”。“止息身行”之语,是将这两种状态总括为一而说的。或者,是就以下情况而说:行者先前次第止息了粗重的身行,依此而次第生起了作为身体不再散乱之因的微细、更微细的身行;随后,再将这些微细的身行予以止息,如此最终达到一种处于极微细之顶点而灭尽的身行——对此,便说为“止息寂静、微细的身行”。显示巴利原文
Santaṃ sukhumanti yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa aparipphandanahetūhi ānamanādayo na honti, tathārūpaṃ darathābhāvato santaṃ, anoḷārikatāya sukhumaṃ. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti sāmaññato ekaṃ katvā vadati. Atha vā pubbe oḷārikoḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhento anukkamena kāyassa aparipphandanahetubhūte sukhumasukhumatare uppādetvā tepi paṭippassambhetvā paramasukhumatāya koṭippattaṃ yaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambheti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti.
“Itīti”等是质难者的话。其中,“iti”是表示方式的质词。“kira”表示不悦,意为“竟然如此”。此处的意趣是:若如所说方式,即使极微细的身行也令其止息。“evaṃ sante”意为“若如此,依你所说之理可得时”。“vātūpaladdhiyā”意为“获得风”。“ca”字是并列义,其意趣为:以出入息等风为所缘的心之产生、生起、转起不会发生,且那些出入息等亦应由此止息。“assāsapassāsānañca bhāvanā”意为:粗重的出入息由修习止息后,微细的出入息也不会产生,因为两者都应由此而止息。“ānāpānassatiyā”意为:以入出息为所缘的念也不会转起,因为入出息不复存在。因此,与之相应的入出息念定也不会产生、生起。因为有所缘之法,任何时候都不会无所缘而存在。“na ca naṃ taṃ”中的“naṃ”只是质词。其连接为:智者、有慧者既不入于所说的那种等至,也不从中出起。质难者正是以“一切皆无,导向止息”的意趣而提出质难。显示巴利原文
Itītiādi codakavacanaṃ. Tattha itīti pakāratthe nipāto. Kirāti arucisūcane, evaṃ ceti attho. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – vuttappakārena yadi atisukhumampi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhetīti. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ sati tayā vuttākāre labbhamāne. Vātūpaladdhiyāti vātassa upaladdhiyā. Ca-saddo samuccayattho, assāsādivātārammaṇassa cittassa pabhāvanā uppādanā pavattanā na hoti, te ca tena passambhetabbāti adhippāyo. Assāsapassāsānañca bhāvanāti oḷārike assāsapassāse bhāvanāya paṭippassambhetvā sukhumānaṃ tesaṃ pabhāvanā ca na hoti, ubhayesaṃ tesaṃ tena paṭippassambhetabbato. Ānāpānassatiyāti ānāpānārammaṇāya satiyā ca pavattanaṃ na hoti, ānāpānānaṃ abhāvato. Tato eva taṃsampayuttassa ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā uppādanāpi na hoti. Na hi kadāci ārammaṇena vinā sārammaṇadhammā sambhavanti. Na ca naṃ tanti ettha nanti nipātamattaṃ . Taṃ vuttavidhānaṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā paññavanto na ceva samāpajjantipi tato na vuṭṭhahantipīti yojanā. Evaṃ codako sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvūpanayanaṃ passambhananti adhippāyena codeti.
再者,“iti kira”等是对前述质难的回答。其中,“kira”是“yadi”(若)义的质词。“iti kira sikkhati”意为“若依我所说方式而学”。“evaṃ sante”意为“如此止息时”。“pabhāvanā hoti”的意趣是:虽然粗重身行已止息,但微细身行依然存在;依渐次达到极微细状态的力量,由相的生起,入出息念及入出息念定确实能够产生。显示巴利原文
Puna iti kirātiādi yathāvuttāya codanāya vissajjanā. Tattha kirāti ‘‘yadī’’ti etassa atthe nipāto. Iti kira sikkhati, mayā vuttākārena yadi sikkhatīti attho. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ passambhane sati. Pabhāvanā hotīti yadipi oḷārikā kāyasaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti, sukhumā pana atthevāti anukkamena paramasukhumabhāvappattassa vasena nimittuppattiyā ānāpānassatiyā, ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā ijjhatevāti adhippāyo.
“yathā kathaṃ viyā”意为:所说的方式应如何理解?其意趣是:阐释此义时,可有譬喻?如今为显示譬喻,而说“seyyathāpī”等。其中,“seyyathāpī”是表譬喻的质词。“kaṃse”意为在铜器中。“nimittaṃ”即“nimittassa”(相的),指那些声音转起的状态,此处为属格用作宾格。“suggahitattā”意为因善巧地执取。“sumanasikatattā”意为因善巧地安立于心中。“sūpadhāritattā”意为因正确地观察、善标记。“sukhumakā saddā”是就随响而说,指那些微细的声音,此处的“ka”字表微小之义。“sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpi”意为:微细的声音本身就是相,即微细声相,以彼为所缘。这意味着:虽然那时微细的声音已灭,但由于声相被善巧执取,心也以更微细的声相为所缘而转起。从那已灭的各个声音之相开始,以不散乱的心观察者,渐次乃至最终,也以极微细的声相为所缘,心持续转起,心不散乱。显示巴利原文
Yathā kathaṃ viyāti yathāvuttavidhānaṃ taṃ kathaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, atthi kiñci tadatthasampaṭipādane opammanti adhippāyo. Idāni opammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha seyyathāpīti opammatthe nipāto. Kaṃseti kaṃsabhājane. Nimittanti nimittassa, tesaṃ saddānaṃ pavattākārassāti attho. Sāmiatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Suggahitattāti suṭṭhu gahitattā. Sumanasikatattāti suṭṭhu citte ṭhapitattā. Sūpadhāritattāti sammadeva upadhāritattā sallakkhitattā. Sukhumakā saddāti anurave āha, ye appakā. Appattho hi ayaṃ ka-saddo. Sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpīti sukhumo saddova nimittaṃ sukhumasaddanimittaṃ, tadārammaṇatāyapi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Kāmaṃ tadāsukhumāpi saddā niruddhā, saddanimittassa pana suggahitattā sukhumatarasaddanimittārammaṇabhāvenāpi cittaṃ pavattati. Ādito paṭṭhāya hi tassa tassa niruddhassa saddassa nimittaṃ avikkhittena cittena upadhārentassa anukkamena pariyosāne atisukhumasaddanimittampi ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ pavattateva. Cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati tasmiṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte samādhānasabbhāvato.
“evaṃ sante”等语,是为总结前文所阐之义而说。其中,为了将结合质难与简别而解明其义的经文句子拈出,并分别显示身随观念处等,而说“passambhayaṃ”等。这一切由于前已明其理趣,故浅显易了。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ santetiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha yassa suttapadassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi attho vutto, taṃ uddharitvā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘passambhaya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ vuttanayattā uttānameva.
222 “Ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasena”是就止业处而说。至于观业处,在其余的四组中亦能获得。“ettha”指第一组。“pañcasandhikaṃ”意为五节,即五部分。显示巴利原文
222.Ādikammikassakammaṭṭhānavasenāti samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vipassanaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pana itaracatukkesupi labbhateva. Etthāti paṭhamacatukke. Pañcasandhikanti pañcapabbaṃ, pañcabhāganti attho.
“kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ”意为学习业处典籍。“tadatthaparipucchā”是对业处义理的询问。或者,从文本与义理两方面学习业处,称为“uggaho”;其中,对疑惑的询问,称为“paripucchā”。“kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānaṃ”是相的现起,即如此精勤修习者审察“此处相如此现起”;同样,业处的安止即“如此得定”。“kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇaṃ”意为:依计数、随逐、触而策励修习之后,安止的成就,或从此之后依观察等达到顶点,即对业处特相的观察。因此说“意为对业处特相的审察”。显示巴利原文
Kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhananti kammaṭṭhānaganthassa uggaṇhanaṃ. Tadatthaparipucchā kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. Atha vā ganthato, atthato ca kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ uggaho. Tattha saṃsayaparipucchanā paripucchā. Kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānanti nimittupaṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa ‘‘evamidha nimittaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti upadhāraṇaṃ, tathā kammaṭṭhānappanā ‘‘evaṃ jhānamappetī’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇanti gaṇanānubandhanāphusanānaṃ vasena bhāvanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ṭhapanāya sampatti, tato parampi vā sallakkhaṇādivasena matthakappattīti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvassa sallakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasabhāvūpadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
自身亦不感疲倦,因仅需部分地学习业处故;由此亦不烦扰导师,因能将法及其因由修至究竟故。‘tasmā’意为:由于此相是自身不疲倦及不恼害导师之因。‘thokaṃ’意为少许、点滴。‘uggaho’是应学习之义,指一切业处的方法,不唯先前所说的学习。‘ācariyuggaho’即从导师处学习。‘ekapadam’意为一部分。显示巴利原文
Attanāpi na kilamati odhiso kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanato. Tato eva ācariyampi na viheseti dhammādhikaraṇampi bhāvanāya matthakaṃ pāpanato. Tasmāti taṃ nimittaṃ attano akilamanaācariyāvihesanahetu. Thokanti thokaṃ thokaṃ. Uggahetabbato uggaho, sabbopi kammaṭṭhānavidhi, na pubbe vuttauggahamattaṃ. Ācariyato uggaho ācariyuggaho, tato. Ekapadampīti ekakoṭṭhāsampi.
223 随行:即正念追随入出息而无间断地持续转起。触:谓计数入出息者,在收摄计数后,以正念跟随它们,并安立其心如安止生起时那样,于鼻端等处触知它们。然而,为了说明并非像计数等那样另有依触为缘的别别作意,而应在触处即行计数等,故在此阐明‘触’所取之义:‘触即触处’。安立:即等持。因心正确地安住于所缘,即是安立。正如‘心之安住、善住’(《法集论》11.15)所指示的,定即是如此。而安止以定为主,故说‘安立即安止’。随观:即观,由觉察无常等相故。由从转起及从相回转,名为回转,此是道。由一切杂染完全寂止,故为遍净,此是果。此二者即回转与遍净。对观:即反复地看、反复地观察,故说‘省察’。显示巴利原文
223.Anuvahanāti assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanavasena satiyā nirantaraṃ anupavattanā. Phusanāti assāsapassāse gaṇentassa gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhantassa yathā appanā hoti, tathā cittaṃ ṭhapentassa ca nāsikaggādiṭṭhānassa nesaṃ phusanā. Yasmā pana gaṇanādivasena viya phusanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi, phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇanādi kātabbanti dassetuṃ idha phusanāgahaṇanti dīpento ‘‘phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Ṭhapanāti samādhānaṃ. Taṃ hi sammadeva ārammaṇe cittassa ādhānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ hoti. Tathā hi samādhi ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti saṇṭhitī’’ti (dha. sa. 11.15) niddiṭṭho. Samādhippadhānā pana appanāti āha ‘‘ṭhapanāti appanā’’ti. Aniccatādīnaṃ sallakkhaṇato sallakkhaṇā vipassanā. Pavattato, nimittato ca vinivaṭṭanato vivaṭṭanā nāma maggo. Sakalasaṃkilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvato sabbaso suddhīti pārisuddhi phalaṃ. Tesanti vivaṭṭanāpārisuddhīnaṃ. Paṭipassanāti paṭi paṭi dassanaṃ pekkhanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccavekkhaṇā’’ti.
分断:即以一、三、五等计数方式所作的分段。于场合:这是就计数方法而说。唯依计数,非依业处。‘是否已达顶点?’这是就长时间作意于计数者而说。因为他可能仅依如此获得的不散乱便生起这种想法。‘于入出息中,取那现起者’:这是针对那些入出息中只有一个先现起者而说;若两者都现起,则应取两者而计数。又应知,‘那现起者’此语也显示了另一层含义:在两鼻孔的风中,哪个更明显现起,即应取那个。‘正在转起、正在转起’:以重复语显示对入出息无间断的觉察。‘如是’:即依前述方式觉察。它们变得明显:因以计数方式,向外散乱止息故。显示巴利原文
Khaṇḍanti ekaṃ tīṇi pañcāti evaṃ gaṇanāya khaṇḍanaṃ. Okāseti gaṇanavidhiṃ sandhāyāha. Gaṇananissitova na kammaṭṭhānanissito. ‘‘Sikhāppattaṃ nu kho’’ti idaṃ cirataraṃ gaṇanāya manasi karontassa vasena vuttaṃ. So hi tathā laddhaṃ avikkhepamattaṃ nissāya evaṃ maññeyya . ‘‘Assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvā’’ti idaṃ assāsapassāsesu yassa ekova paṭhamaṃ upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yassa pana ubhopi upaṭṭhahanti, tena ubhayampi gahetvā gaṇetabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo upaṭṭhātī’’ti iminā ca dvīsu nāsāpuṭavātesu yo pākaṭataro upaṭṭhāti, so gahetabboti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pavattamānaṃ pavattamānanti āmeḍitavacanena nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Evanti vuttappakārena upalakkhetvā vāti attho. Pākaṭā honti gaṇanāvasena bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato.
门闩的转动,搁置门闩之处,即是门闩柱。‘tiyāmarattiṃ(整夜)’一词,是持续结合关系中的业格。‘依前法’:即快速计数,指牧牛者的计数方法。一、二、三、四、五:这是对计数方式的显示。因此,在八等数中,也应当从一开始,逐一达到八等。应快速、迅速地计数。为何如此?文中以‘因为系属于计数’等显示其理由与例证。其中,arīyati tena nāvā(以此而船被驱动),故得名aritta(桨),即划船所用的桨。以桨支撑,名为arittupatthambhana(桨的支撑),据此而说。显示巴利原文
Palighassa parivattanaṃ, taṃ yattha nikkhipanti, so palighatthambho. Tiyāmarattinti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Purimanayenāti sīghagaṇanāya, gopālakagaṇanāyāti attho. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañcāti gaṇanāvidhidassanaṃ. Tasmā aṭṭhātiādīsupi ekato paṭṭhāyeva paccekaṃ aṭṭhādīni pāpetabbāni. Sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbameva. Kasmāti tattha kāraṇaṃ, nidassanañca dasseti ‘‘gaṇanapaṭibaddhe hī’’tiādinā. Tattha arīyati tena nāvāti arittaṃ, pājanadaṇḍo. Arittena upatthambhanaṃ arittupatthambhanaṃ, tassa vasena.
从严格意义上说,无间断的转起,其实只是假立而已,所以说‘犹如无间断转起一般’。作意进入内部的风,即名为将心引入内部。将心引出外部时,其理亦同。‘被风冲击’:对多作意内部风的人,该处便如同被风冲击,或如充满脂肪一般,如此现起。‘于引出时’:指放出所触之处;然而,当如此引出时,心以观察风的走向为门,便驰散于种种所缘,故说‘心于种种所缘散乱’。显示巴利原文
Nippariyāyato nirantarappavatti nāma ṭhapanāyamevāti āha ‘‘nirantaraṃ pavattaṃ viyā’’ti. Anto pavisantaṃ vātaṃ manasi karonto anto cittaṃ paveseti nāma. Bahi cittanīharaṇepi eseva nayo. Vātabbhāhatanti abbhantaragataṃ vātaṃ bahulaṃ manasi karontassa vātena taṃ ṭhānaṃ abbhāhataṃ viya, medena pūritaṃ viya ca hoti, tathā upaṭṭhāti. Nīharato phuṭṭhokāsaṃ muñcitvā, tathā pana nīharato vātassa gatisamannesanamukhena nānārammaṇesu cittaṃ vidhāvatīti āha ‘‘puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipatī’’ti.
此:即此所生的入出息。显示巴利原文
Etanti etaṃ assāsapassāsajātaṃ.
224 随行:对于正在转起的入出息,以之为所缘,令念一一跟随而转起,这便是随行。因此他说:‘而那并非以初中后随行’。脐为始,因入出息首先生起于此处。这里以首先生起而说为‘始’,不是说任何生起之处都称为始。实际上,它们从脐开始直至鼻端,处处生起。它们于何处生起,便在该处坏灭,因为诸法并无移动。然而依于因缘在别处生起,假名为‘行’。心脏为中间:即心脏附近,以其上半部分为中间。鼻端为终:即鼻尖是其终点,因为入出息的假名以此为界限。因为据称它们‘是心等起的’,而心等起之物不可能存在于外界。因此他说:‘进入内部的风,以鼻端为始’。然而应知,出入的次第是由相似性而说的。已趣散乱:即已进入散乱,意为散乱、不定。有热恼:即具有烦扰的状态。有动摇:即动摇、动转。同样,有颤动。显示巴利原文
224.Anugamananti pavattapavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena satiyā anu anu pavattanaṃ anugacchanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tañca kho na ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasenā’’ti. Nābhi ādi tattha paṭhamaṃ uppajjanato. Paṭhamuppattivasena hi idha ādicintā, na uppattimattavasena. Tathā hi te nābhito paṭṭhāya yāva nāsikaggā sabbattha uppajjanteva. Yattha yattha ca uppajjanti, tattha tattheva bhijjanti dhammānaṃ gamanābhāvato. Yathāpaccayaṃ pana desantaruppattiyaṃ gatisamaññā. Hadayaṃ majjhanti hadayasamīpaṃ tassa uparibhāgo majjhaṃ. Nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānanti nāsikaṭṭhānaṃ tassa pariyosānaṃ assāsapassāsasamaññāya tadavadhibhāvato. Tathā hete ‘‘cittasamuṭṭhānā’’ti vuttā, na ca bahiddhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ sambhavo atthi. Tenāha ‘‘abbhantaraṃ pavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādī’’ti. Pavisananikkhamanapariyāyo pana taṃsadisavasena vuttoti veditabbo. Vikkhepagatanti vikkhepaṃ upagataṃ, vikkhittaṃ asamāhitanti attho. Sāraddhāyāti sadarathabhāvāya. Iñjanāyāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa calanāya.
‘以已趣散乱的心’:此处的具格表示原因,或表示状态特征。有热恼:即具有烦扰。有动摇:即动摇、动转。同样,有颤动。显示巴利原文
Vikkhepagatena cittenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe vā. Sāraddhāti sadarathā. Iñjitāti iñjanakā calanakā. Tathā phanditā.
所谓‘依初中后’,意即不应以随行初中后的方式作意——这是句子的连接。为了阐明‘随隶属地作意时,应依触和依安住而作意’这一意图,便说‘犹如依计数和隶属的方式’等。在那里,没有单独的作意:即若没有计数和隶属,那么唯独依触、依安住的业处作意便不能次第存在。难道不是没有触就没有安住,没有触就连计数的作意也不存在吗?虽如此,但正如计数作为业处作意的根本而应首先把握,隶属对于安住也是如此,因为没有隶属,安住便不可能。因此,虽然触没有无间隔性,但为了显示以计数和隶属为根本、为首要而把握的时候,另外两者便不存在,故说:‘正如依计数和隶属的方式,没有单独的依触和安住作意。’若如此,为何在总说中又单独列出它们呢?于是说‘就在触触之处’等句。其中,‘就在触触之处计数’表示触是计数的支分。因此说‘依计数和触而作意’。‘就在那里’:即就在触触之处。‘它们’:指入出息。‘以念随行’:指随顺计数的过程,以念系缚,即在触处无间断地持守它们。‘以安止而安立心’:指如同安止生起那样,将心安立于现起的似相上。显示巴利原文
Ādimajjhapariyosānavasenāti ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena na manasi kātabbanti sambandho. ‘‘Anubandhanāya manasi karontena phusanāvasena ca ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabba’’nti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha visuṃ manasikāro natthīti gaṇanāya, anubandhanāya ca vinā yathākkamaṃ kevalaṃ phusanāvasena, ṭhapanāvasena ca kammaṭṭhānamanasikāro natthi. Nanu phusanāya vinā ṭhapanāya viya, phusanāya vinā gaṇanāyapi manasikāro natthiyeva? Yadipi natthi, gaṇanā pana yathā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetabbā, evaṃ anubandhanā ṭhapanāya, tāya vinā ṭhapanāya asambhavato. Tasmā satipi phusanāya nānantarikabhāve gaṇanānubandhanā eva mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetvā itarāsaṃ tadabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ tā kasmā uddese visuṃ gahitāti āha ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyevā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇento’’ti iminā gaṇanāya phusanā aṅganti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti. Tatthevāti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva. Teti assāsapassāse. Satiyā anubandhantoti gaṇanāvīthiṃ anugantvā satiyā nibandhanto, phuṭṭhokāseyeva te nirantaraṃ upadhārentoti attho. Appanāvasena cittaṃ ṭhapentoti yathā appanā hoti, evaṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte cittaṃ ṭhapento samādahanto. Anubandhanāya cātiādīsu anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccatīti yojanā. Svāyamatthoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇento, tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto’’ti ca vutto, so ayamattho. Yā accantāya na minoti na vinicchināti, sā mānassa samīpeti upamā yathā ‘‘goṇo viya gavayo’’ti.
225 ‘跛者’指坐垫。‘轿’指摇篮。‘戏玩’指正在游戏的人。‘母子’指自己的妻与子。‘两端’指来者的前端和去者的后端,即两端。‘中间’指轿板的正中。‘犹如系缚柱’:系缚柱即鼻端或口相,在其根部附近安立。怎样安立?依念而安立。因为当瑜伽行者将念善巧地安立于彼处时,即称为‘站立在那里’,这是以组成部分的名称来指称整体。‘于相’即在鼻端等相上。‘以念而坐’即依念而安坐。‘因为念在那里’等,也应如‘站立’的情况那样来解释。‘在那里’指在触触之处。显示巴利原文
225.Paṅguḷoti pīṭhasappī. Dolā pekholo. Kīḷatanti kīḷantānaṃ. Mātāputtānanti attano bhariyāya, puttassa ca. Ubho koṭiyoti āgacchantassa purimakoṭiṃ, gacchantassa pacchimakoṭinti dvepi koṭiyo. Majjhanti dolāphalakasseva majjhaṃ. Upanibandhanathambho viyāti upanibandhanathambho, nāsikaggaṃ, mukhanimittaṃ vā, tassa mūle samīpe ṭhatvā. Kathaṃ ṭhatvā? Satiyā vasena. Satiñhi tattha sūpaṭṭhitaṃ karonto yogāvacaro tattha ṭhito nāma hoti, avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbato. Nimitteti nāsikaggādinimitte. Satiyā nisīdantoti sativasena nisīdanto. ‘‘Satiñhi tatthā’’tiādinā ṭhāne viya vattabbaṃ. Tatthāti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāne.
226 ‘他们’指城内与城外的人们,以及他们的随从和手中所持之物。显示巴利原文
226.Teti nagarassa antobahigatā manussā, tesaṃ saṅgahā ca hatthagatā.
227 ‘从初始开始’指从显示所喻之义开始。‘在偈颂中,相’是指系缚的相。‘非一所缘’指并非单一心的所缘,即不成为所缘的意思。‘而不知三法者’指对于相、入息、出息这三法,不知将其作为所缘而修持的人。‘ca’字表示差别。‘修习’指入出息念的定修习。‘不可得’指不可得、不成就。这是问难偈颂的意思,而第二首答难偈颂则容易理解。显示巴利原文
227.Ādito paṭṭhāyāti upameyyatthadassanato paṭṭhāya. Gāthāyaṃ nimittanti upanibandhanānimittaṃ. Anārammaṇamekacittassāti ekassa cittassa na ārammaṇaṃ, ārammaṇaṃ na hontīti attho. Ajānato ca tayo dhammeti nimittaṃ assāso passāsoti ime tayo dhamme ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avindantassa. Ca-saddo byatireke. Bhāvanāti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā. Nupalabbhatīti na upalabbhati na sijjhatīti ayaṃ codanāgāthāya attho, dutiyā pana parihāragāthā suviññeyyāva.
‘如何’是为了阐明其义而发起的欲说之问。在‘此三法’等句中,连同句子的连接,这是义理的解释:此相、入息、出息这三法,如何不是单一心的所缘?然而,此三法并非不被了知,如何又不是不被了知呢?因为若不了知它们,心如何不散乱?精进、即令修习成就的勤如何显现?能镇伏盖障、正确带来等持的、称为修习随行的用功,瑜伽行者如何成就?以及如何次第证得世间与出世间的殊胜?显示巴利原文
Kathanti tāsaṃ atthaṃ vivarituṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Ime tayo dhammātiādīsu padayojanāya saddhiṃ ayamatthaniddeso – ime nimittādayo tayo dhammā ekacittassa kathaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na honti, tathāpi na cime na ca ime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, kathaṃ na ca honti aviditā? Tesañhi aviditatte cittañca kathaṃ vikkhepaṃ na gacchati, padhānañca bhāvanāya nipphādakaṃ vīriyañca kathaṃ paññāyati, nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhakaṃ sammadeva samādhānāvahaṃ bhāvanānuyogasaṅkhātaṃ payogañca yogī kathaṃ sādheti, uparūpari lokiyalokuttarañca visesaṃ kathamadhigacchatīti.
现在,为了以锯喻成立此义,而说“譬如”等。由于地面不平,在摇晃的树上,锯切的工作不易完成,而且如此一来,锯齿的来去走向难以了知,因此说“在平坦的地面上”。“以锯”是指以小而齿利的锯。所以说“人”。“所触的锯齿”是指每一接触处的锯齿,以此表示那人只在锯齿所触之处令念现前。因此说“他对来或去的锯齿不作意”。在拉锯时,朝向人而转起的称为“来”;在推锯时,由此离去的称为“去”。而来与去的锯齿并非不被了知,因为念在一切处都已现前,而锯齿若不触锯处,则无来去。“精进”是指锯树时的精勤。“用功”是指其锯切的活动。“殊胜”是指所成就的多种状态,以及由此所应证得的卓越利益。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ kakacūpamāya sādhetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhūmibhāgassa visamatāya cañcale rukkhe chedanakiriyā na sukarā siyā, tathā ca sati kakacadantagati dubbiññeyyāti āha ‘‘same bhūmibhāge’’ti. Kakacenāti khuddakena kharapattena. Tenāha ‘‘puriso’’ti. Phuṭṭhakakacadantānanti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena. Tena kakacadantehi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva purisassa satiyā upaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karotī’’ti. Kakacassa ākaḍḍhanakāle purisābhimukhaṃ pavattā āgatā. Pellanakāle tato vigatā ‘‘gatā’’ti vuttā. Na ca āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti sabbattha satiyā upaṭṭhitattā chinditabbaṭṭhānaṃ aphusitvā gacchantānaṃ, āgacchantānañca kakacadantānaṃ abhāvato. Padhānanti rukkhassa chedanavīriyaṃ . Payoganti tasseva chedanakiriyaṃ. Visesanti anekabhāvāpādanaṃ, tena ca sādhetabbaṃ payojanavisesaṃ.
“如树”等是譬喻的配合。“念”能令心系着于所缘,故称“能系”;其取入出息相,故名“能系之相”,即鼻端或口相。同样地,正如那锯木之人,虽不刻意关注来去的锯齿,但通过将念安立于每一接触之处,便了知来去的锯齿,且不错失墨线,完成应作之事;同样地,在这鼻端或口相上,长鼻者取鼻端,其余(短鼻者)取口相。“口相”即上唇,因依此而闭口,故得此名。显示巴利原文
Yathā rukkhotiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Upanibandhati ārammaṇe cittaṃ etāyāti sati upanibandhanā nāma, tassā assāsapassāsānaṃ sallakkhaṇassa nimittanti upanibandhanānimittaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ, mukhanimittaṃ vā. Evamevāti yathāpi so puriso kakacena rukkhaṃ chindanto āgatagate kakacadante amanasikarontopi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva satiyā upaṭṭhapanena āgatagate kakacadante jānāti, suttapadañca avirajjhanto atthakiccaṃ sādheti, evameva. Nāsikagge mukhanimitteti dīghanāsiko nāsikagge itaro mukhaṃ dasanaṃ nimīyati chādīyati etenāti mukhanimittanti laddhanāme uttaroṭṭhe.
“此精勤”:以该精进策励,令已发勤精进的瑜伽行者,其身与心皆成为堪业、适于修习之业。此精进即称为“精勤”,这是以果显因。“诸随烦恼被断除”:作为心之随烦恼的诸盖,以镇伏方式被断除。“诸寻止息”:由此,欲寻等邪寻止息。或者,以断除诸盖显示初禅的证得后,再以诸寻止息的说法,宣说第二禅等的证得。“此勤修”:此业处随修,是证得禅那之因的勤修。“诸结被断除”:十结依道之次第,以正断方式断除。“诸随眠被根绝”:同样,七随眠因令其不再生起,乃至最微细的残余也无余,便成灭尽。在此,为显示“结之断除”即是随眠之灭尽,且结已断时随眠亦无丝毫残余,故说“诸结被断除,诸随眠被根绝”。“此殊胜”:依此定而次第获得的这些结之断除等,即是此定的殊胜,这就是其义。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ padhānanti yena vīriyārambhena āraddhavīriyassa yogino kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ bhāvanākammakkhamaṃ bhāvanākammayoggaṃ hoti, idaṃ vīriyaṃ padhānanti phalena hetuṃ dasseti. Upakkilesā pahīyantīti cittassa upakkilesabhūtāni nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanavasena pahīyanti. Vitakkā vūpasamantīti tato eva kāmavitakkādayo micchāvitakkā upasamaṃ gacchanti, nīvaraṇappahānena vā paṭhamajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā vitakkavūpasamāpadesena dutiyajjhānādīnamadhigamamāha. Ayaṃ payogoti ayaṃ jhānādhigamassa hetubhūto kammaṭṭhānānuyogo payogo. Saṃyojanā pahīyantīti dasapi saṃyojanāni maggapaṭipāṭiyā samucchedavasena pahīyanti. Anusayā byantī hontīti tathā sattapi anusayā anuppattidhammatāpādanena bhaṅgamattassapi anavasesato vigatantā honti. Ettha ca saṃyojanappahānaṃ nāma anusayanirodheneva hoti, pahīnesu ca saṃyojanesu anusayānaṃ lesopi na bhavissatīti ca dassanatthaṃ ‘‘saṃyojanā pahīyanti anusayā byantī hontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ visesoti imaṃ samādhiṃ nissāya anukkamena labbhamāno ayaṃ saṃyojanappahānādiko imassa samādhissa visesoti attho.
Yassā意为yena,即“以此”;Anupubba意为次第地;Paricitā意为已熟习。此处略义为:正如入出息念是依佛世尊所教导的,若有人依了知长短等方法,次第熟习、善加修习,由此圆满成就十六事,便完全具足。该比丘以智慧之光,照耀自身蕴等世间。如同出云之月,脱离云之随烦恼的月轮,即是星宿之王。显示巴利原文
Yassāti yena. Anupubbanti anukkamena. Paricitāti pariciṇṇā. Ayaṃ hettha saṅkhepattho – ānāpānassati yathā buddhena bhagavatā desitā , tatheva yena dīgharassapajānanādividhinā anupubbaṃ paricitā suṭṭhu bhāvitā, tato eva paripuṇṇā soḷasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ pāripūriyā sabbaso puṇṇā. So bhikkhu imaṃ attano khandhādilokaṃ paññobhāsena pabhāseti. Yathā kiṃ abbhā muttova candimā abbhupakkilesavimutto candimā tārakarājā viyāti.
“此处”:指锯喻中。“其”:指瑜伽行者。或者,“此处”指这个位置,“其”指作为譬喻的锯。如同那人对于锯齿的来去不作意,同样,对于入出息之来去,只以不作意为用。显示巴利原文
Idhāti kakacūpamāyaṃ. Assāti yogino. Idhāti vā imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Assāti upamābhūtassa kakacassa. Āgatagatavasena yathā tassa purisassa amanasikāro, evaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ āgatagatavasena amanasikāramattameva payojanaṃ.
228 228.“相”:指似相。“为其余禅支所庄严”:他们说“为无寻等其余禅支所庄严”,然应说“为伺等”,因为严格而言,安止中并无寻。寻在圣典中被描述为“安止、遍止”,或因其相应,故注释书称禅那为“安止”;又因禅支中定为主导,为显示此“安止”,故说“为其余禅支所庄严、称为安止的住立得以成就”。然而,对于某些人,从以计数方式作意之时起,“次第……乃至……似成跳过之状”这一段文字已缺失。显示巴利原文
228.Nimittanti paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti appanāvitakkādiavasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti vadanti, vicārādīti pana vattabbaṃ nippariyāyena vitakkassa appanābhāvato. So hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘appanā byappanā’’ti (dha. sa. 7) niddiṭṭho, taṃsampayogato vā yasmā jhānaṃ ‘‘appanā’’ti aṭṭhakathāvohāro, jhānaṅgesu ca samādhi padhānaṃ, tasmā taṃ ‘‘appanā’’ti dassento ‘‘avasesajhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjatī’’ti āha. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhutīti ettha ‘‘anukkamato…pe… laṅghanākārappattaṃ viya hotī’’ti ettako gantho parihīno.
对于身体沉重者,因依附板条等物而向前倾。“发出声响”:即发出声音。在肢体、臀、肘等关节处起皱,处处呈现皱纹。何以故?因为身体沉重者,其身粗重。与身粗重止息相伴而成就的粗显入出息灭,以遮诠的方式说为他的成就。“以粗显入出息之灭故”:以表诠方式说其义之成就。其中,“身粗重止息时”:由心生色法的轻快、柔软、适业性,令其余相续色法也具有轻快等特性,此即此处所说的“身之轻快”。而此身之轻快,若无心的轻快等则不存在,故说“身与心皆轻快”。显示巴利原文
Sāraddhakāyassa kassaci puggalassa. Onamati paṭṭikādīnaṃ palambanena. Vikūjatīti saddaṃ karoti. Gattānisadakapparādīnaṃ sandhiṭṭhānesu valiṃ gaṇhāti tattha tattha valitaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā sāraddhakāyo garuko hotīti kāyadarathavūpasamena saddhiṃ sijjhamāno oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodho byatirekamukhena tassa sādhanaṃ viya vutto. Oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasenāti anvayavasena tadatthasādhanaṃ. Tattha kāyadarathe vūpasanteti cittajarūpānaṃ lahumudukammaññabhāvena yo sesatisantatirūpānampi lahuādibhāvo, so idha kāyassa lahubhāvoti adhippeto. Svāyaṃ yasmā cittassa lahuādibhāvena vinā natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hotī’’ti.
“粗显入出息灭时”等,虽已在前文说明,但为了显示对应当审察的身行的审察方式,故再次引述。显示巴利原文
Oḷārikeassāsapassāse niruddhetiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayampi vicetabbākārappattassa kāyasaṅkhārassa vicayanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ānītaṃ.
229 “上上而显著”:依修习之力,向上层层变得明显。“就处所而言”:指自然触处,即先前自己以触的方式所持之处。显示巴利原文
229.Uparūpari vibhūtānīti bhāvanābalena uddhaṃ uddhaṃ pākaṭāni honti. Desatoti pakatiyā phusanadesato, pubbe attanā phusanavasena upadhāritaṭṭhānato.
“何处无”是就处所而言,“谁无”是就人而言,为了将这两方面考察的含义合在一起加以阐明,故说“在母胎中”等。其中,如同沉入水中的人由于空间被阻断,出息入息不转起一样,在母胎中也是如此。如同死者由于没有令生起的心,无想有情、昏迷者、生于无想天者也是如此,同样,入灭尽定者也是如此。而第四禅的入定者,只是由于法性,他们的出息入息不生起,色界、无色界的有情也是如此。然而有些人说:“由于渐次达到微细状态,第四禅入定者没有出息入息;在色界中,由于色法和有分的微细,色界有情也没有出息入息。”这是他们的理由。意思是:除了上述七种处所之外,没有出息入息不生起之处,所以出息入息必定存在,应当寻求。所谓“依自然接触处”,即依自然接触的部位。“应安立相”,即为了令乐在彼处转起,应令更坚固的认知转起,因为坚固的想是念的足处。这就是对于不现起的入出息,依如拔刺的方法而令现起的方法。“有义”指原因。因为“义”是果,果依其因而转起,故称为“有义”。“失念者”即念已坏失者。“不正知者”即缺乏正知者,意思是:对于修习时渐次显示巴利原文
‘‘Kattha natthī’’ti ṭhānavasena, ‘‘kassa natthī’’ti puggalavasena vīmaṃsiyamānamatthaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘antomātukucchiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā udake nimuggassa puggalassa niruddhokāsatāya assāsapassāsā na pavattanti, evaṃ antomātukucchiyaṃ. Yathā matānaṃ samuṭṭhāpakacittābhāvato, evaṃ asaññībhūtānaṃ mucchāparetānaṃ, asaññīsu vā jātānaṃ, tathā nirodhasamāpannānaṃ. Catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ pana dhammatāvaseneva nesaṃ anuppajjanaṃ, tathā rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘anupubbato sukhumabhāvappattiyā catutthajjhānasamāpannassa, rūpabhave rūpānaṃ bhavaṅgassa ca sukhumabhāvato rūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā pariyesatoti adhippāyo, yathāvuttasattaṭṭhānavinimuttassa assāsapassāsānaṃ anuppajjanaṭṭhānassa abhāvato. Pakatiphuṭṭhavasenāti pakatiyā phusanaṭṭhānavasena. Nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbanti satiyā tattha tattha sukhappavattanatthaṃ thiratarasañjānanaṃ pavattetabbaṃ. Thirasaññāpadaṭṭhānā hi sati. Imamevāti imaṃ eva anupaṭṭhahantassa kāyasaṅkhārassa kaṇṭakuṭṭhāpananayena upaṭṭhāpanavidhimeva. Atthavasanti hetuṃ. Atthoti hi phalaṃ, so yassa vasena pavattati, so atthavasoti. Muṭṭhassatissāti vinaṭṭhassatissa. Asampajānassāti sampajaññarahitassa, bhāventassa anukkamena anupaṭṭhahante assāsapassāse vīmaṃsitvā ‘‘ime te’’ti upadhāretuṃ, sammadeva pajānituñca samatthāhi satipaññāhi virahitassāti adhippāyo.
230 与此不同的业处。“重”即沉重。由于它的修习极为困难,故说“重之修习”。由于它逐渐达到极微细的状态,所以说“需要强有力、极清净且勇猛的念与慧”。为表明微细义理的成就也必须以微细的方式达成,因而说“正如……”等。现在,为说明对于不现起的入出息寻求的方法,说“而且以这些……”等。其中,“于行境之口”即面向行境。“随句”即一句接一句。“行已”即执取行境之后。“即于彼处”即于称为安止相之处。“系合”即以作意系合。或者说“以念之光线系缚”,正表达了“即于彼处系合”之义,因为在譬喻中,系缚与系合并非处处可得。显示巴利原文
230.Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ. Garukanti bhāriyaṃ. Sā cassa garukatā bhāvanāya sudukkarabhāvenāti āha ‘‘garukabhāvana’’nti. Uparūpari santasukhumabhāvappattito ‘‘balavatī suvisadā sūrā ca satipaññā ca icchitabbā’’ti vatvā sukhumassa nāma atthassa sādhanenāpi sukhumeneva bhavitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni anupaṭṭhahantānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pariyesanupāyaṃ dassento ‘‘tāhi ca panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gocaramukheti gocarābhimukhe. Anupadanti padānupadaṃ. Caritvāti gocaraṃ gahetvā. Tasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti upanibandhanānimittasaññitaṭṭhāne. Yojetvāti manasikārena yojetvā. Satirasmiyā bandhitvāti vā vuttamevatthamāha ‘‘tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā’’ti. Na hi upameyye bandhanayojanaṭṭhānāni visuṃ labbhanti.
231 “相”指取相或似相。此处将二者合在一起说。其中,棉絮等三个譬喻适用于取相,其余譬喻则适用于两者。“有些”是指某些阿阇梨。显示巴利原文
231.Nimittanti uggahanimittaṃ, paṭibhāganimittaṃ vā. Ubhayampi hi idha ekajjhaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tūlapicuādiupamattayaṃ uggahe yujjati, sesaṃ ubhayattha. Ekacceti eke ācariyā.
“如星形”即如星星的光明之形。摩尼珠等譬喻适用于似相。然而,为何同一个业处会以多种方式现起呢?因此说“而且这个”等。“经”指一部经。因其熟练地转起而无间断,且所缘广大,故说“如大山上之河”。由于义理与文句的成就,一部各方面都圆满的经,如同一切部分都令人喜爱、一切枝叶花果都盛开的林丛,所以说“如一林丛”。因此世尊说:“如林丛中,花满枝头。”具有种种连贯、种种重复、种种理趣、微妙、多种业处法门的经,应被求法者恭敬地受持,所以说“如清凉树荫……的树”。“由于想的不同”,是指在相现起之前,先前转起的想有种种不同的状态。显示巴利原文
Tārakarūpaṃ viyāti tārakāya pabhārūpaṃ viya. Maṇiguḷikādiupamā paṭibhāge vaṭṭanti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ekaṃyeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ anekākārato upaṭṭhātīti āha ‘‘tañca paneta’’ntiādi. Suttantanti ekaṃ suttaṃ. Paguṇappavattibhāvena avicchedaṃ, mahāvisayatañca sandhāyāha ‘‘mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viyā’’ti. Atthabyañjanasampattiyā samantabhaddakaṃ suttaṃ sabbabhāgamanoharā sabbapāliphullā vanaghaṭā viyāti āha ‘‘ekā vanarāji viyā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge’’ti (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236). Nānānusandhikaṃ nānāpeyyālaṃ vividhanayanipuṇaṃ bahuvidhakammaṭṭhānamukhasuttantaṃ atthikehi sakkaccaṃ samupajīvitabbanti āha ‘‘sītacchāyo…pe… rukkho viyā’’ti. Saññānānatāyāti nimittupaṭṭhānato pubbeva pavattasaññānaṃ nānāvidhabhāvato.
“此三法”指出息、入息和相这三法。“无”是指作为业处而应被作意的意义上,没有、不可得。而“不到近行”,是指连近行定也达不到,更不用说安止定了,这是它的意思。“然而对于有些人”,应知这是指存在的情况,依照前述方法去理解。显示巴利原文
Ime tayo dhammāti assāso, passāso, nimittanti ime tayo dhammā. Natthīti kammaṭṭhānavasena manasikātabbabhāvena natthi na upalabbhanti. Na ca upacāranti upacārampi na pāpuṇāti, pageva appananti adhippāyo. Yassa panāti vijjamānapakkho vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
现在,为了佐证刚才所说的义理,引用了锯子譬喻中有关“相”等的偈颂。显示巴利原文
Idāni vuttasseva atthassa samatthanatthaṃ kakacūpamāyaṃ āgatā ‘‘nimitta’’ntiādikā gāthā paccānītā.
232 232. “相”指如前所说的似相。“这样会”意指唯有修习者才会如此。因此应当教导他:“你应一再地这样作意”。“会生退缩”是说心想:“相很难生起,如今我已得到了,以后随时都可证得殊胜”,由此而退缩。“会沮丧”是说心想:“修了这么久,连相都还没生起,我恐怕没有能力证得殊胜”,由此而沮丧。显示巴利原文
232.Nimitteti yathāvutte paṭibhāganimitte. Evaṃ hotīti bhāvanamanuyuttassa eva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘punappunaṃ evaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vattabbo. Vosānaṃ āpajjeyyāti ‘‘nimittaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ uppādetuṃ, tayidaṃ laddhaṃ, handāhaṃ dāni yadā vā tadā vā visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjeyya. Visīdeyyāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa nimittampi na uppannaṃ, abhabbo maññe visesassā’’ti visādaṃ āpajjeyya.
当说到“对于依此行道、志在解脱老死的修行者,相”时,怎么会产生退缩呢?他反而应当更加精进努力。因此中部诵者说:“此相……应说”。“这样”指以所说的方法,将修习心只安住于似相。“从此以后”指从似相生起之后。前文所说“他以随逐、触和安住而作意”,其中,舍弃随逐与触,唯以安住修习;因此,应唯以安住修习,这便是此处之义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmīti paṭipannassa nimitta’’nti vutte kathaṃ saṅkocāpatti, bhiyyoso mattāya ussāhameva kareyyāti ‘‘nimittamidaṃ…pe… vattabbo’’ti majjhimabhāṇakā āhu. Evanti vuttappakārena paṭibhāganimitteyeva bhāvanācittassa ṭhapanena. Ito pabhutīti ito paṭibhāganimittuppattito paṭṭhāya. Pubbe yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti (visuddhi. 1.224), tattha anubandhanaṃ, phusanañca vissajjetvā ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hotīti ṭhapanāvaseneva bhāvetabbanti attho.
古德已说此义,故诵出“于相”之偈。其中,“相”指似相。“安立心”指将修习心安置,即以安置的方式作意。“种种相”指如“四色”(《清净道论》1.219;《波罗夷义释》2.165;《无碍解道义释》2.1.163)所说之种种差别。此词依相状之共性而用单数。“令消失”指令其辨别而消失。因为从相生起之后,若不作意,那些相状便如同消失一般。“于入出息”指令入出息中的种种差别消失,或令入出息所生相中的种种差别消失。“系缚自心”指即以此安置而将自心紧系,令其投入。然而,若有人将“令消失”释为“辨别、令明显、令清晰”,此义依前分阶段亦可成立。此处之义为:具足坚固慧力的瑜伽行者,辨别入出息中的种种差别,由种种差别而了知它们,令其明显、清晰;或令种种差别中的粗重部分止息、寂静,将心安立于由此所得之相上,次第系缚自心,令其投入。显示巴利原文
Porāṇehi vuttovāyamatthoti ‘‘nimitte’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha nimitteti paṭibhāganimitte. Ṭhapayaṃ cittanti bhāvanācittaṃ ṭhapento, ṭhapanāvasena manasi karontoti attho. Nānākāranti ‘‘cattāro vaṇṇā’’ti (visuddhi. 1.219; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.163) evaṃ vuttaṃ nānākāraṃ. Ākārasāmaññavasena hetaṃ ekavacanaṃ. Vibhāvayanti vibhāvento antaradhāpento. Nimittuppattito paṭṭhāya hi te ākārā amanasikaroto antarahitā viya honti. Assāsapassāseti assāsapassāse yo nānākāro, taṃ vibhāvayaṃ, assāsapassāsasambhūte vā nimitte. Sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatīti tāya eva ṭhapanāya attano cittaṃ upanibandhati, appetīti attho. Ye pana ‘‘vibhāvayanti vibhāvento viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ pubbabhāgavasena yujjeyya. Ayañhettha attho – dhitisampannattā dhīro yogī assāsapassāse nānākāraṃ vibhāvento nānākārato te pajānanto vidite pākaṭe karonto, nānākāraṃ vā oḷārikoḷārike passambhento vūpasamento tattha yaṃ laddhaṃ nimittaṃ, tasmiṃ cittaṃ ṭhapento anukkamena sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhati appetīti.
从颜色而言,指如同棉团、星形等所呈现的颜色。从特相而言,指如同坚硬性等自性,或从无常等特相而言。应保护彼相——此为句中关联。所谓保护相,即是通过保护于彼处所得的近行定来实现,故说“以反复作意之力,令其增长、增广”。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇatoti picupiṇḍatārakarūpādīsu viya upaṭṭhitavaṇṇato. Lakkhaṇatoti kharabhāvādisabhāvato, aniccādilakkhaṇato vā. Rakkhitabbaṃ taṃ nimittanti sambandho. Nimittassa rakkhaṇaṃ nāma tattha paṭiladdhassa upacārajhānassa rakkhaṇeneva hotīti āha ‘‘punappunaṃ manasikāravasena vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ gamayitvā’’ti.
233 233. 此处:指于此身观念处之中。欲达清净者:即欲证得、欲入定者。其中,依简择与回转之力而欲证得,依简择之力而欲入定——应如此结合理解。“安立名色而后修观”是略说之义,为详示此义,故说“如何”等。其中,“犹如”等是显示身、心及入出息的集起状态。“铁匠的皮囊”指铁匠熔炉中鼓风的皮囊。“被鼓动时”指被鼓动、令风被吸入时。“随应”指随其相应。同样地,此处应将所生之身视为如铁匠的皮囊,将精进视为如心。虽然入出息是心所生,但若无此所生身,它们便不能转起,故说“依于身与心而有入出息”。显示巴利原文
233.Etthāti etissaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ. Pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmoti adhigantukāmo, samāpajjitukāmo ca, tattha sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena adhigantukāmo, sallakkhaṇāvasena samāpajjitukāmoti yojetabbaṃ. Nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapetvā vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetīti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathā hītiādi kāyassa, cittassa ca assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayabhāvadassanaṃ. Kammāragaggariyāti kammārānaṃ ukkāyaṃ aggidhamanabhastā. Dhamamānāyāti dhamayantiyā, vātaṃ gāhāpentiyāti attho. Tajjanti tadanurūpaṃ. Evamevāti ettha kammāragaggarī viya karajakāyo, vāyāmo viya cittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānā, karajakāyaṃ pana vinā tesaṃ appavattanato ‘‘kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“彼”指名色。“探寻其缘”指以“由无明集起而有色集起”等方式,审察、把握无明等缘。“度脱疑惑”指超越、断除以“我于过去世是否存在”等句类所起的十六种事相的疑惑。“凡任何色,过去、未来、现在”等句类所起的,是聚团思惟。在前分阶段:指在属于行道智见清净的生灭随观的前分阶段所生起的。光明等:即光明、智、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、舍、现起、欲着——此十种光明等。舍弃生:指舍弃于生灭随观中所执取的诸行之生,唯随观其坏灭,从而证得坏灭随观智,以过患随观为先导,于厌离随观中厌离。于欲解脱、审察随观、行舍、随顺智的修习终了时,生起种姓智,紧接着生起道智,于一切诸行中离染、解脱。因为在道刹那,圣者被称为离染、解脱。故说“次第证得四圣道”。以道、果、涅槃、已断与残余烦恼所摄的应察法的差别,有十九种差别。对于阿罗汉,因无残余烦恼,故为十九种。“彼”指入出息念业处修行者。显示巴利原文
Tassāti nāmarūpassa. Paccayaṃ pariyesatīti ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.50) avijjādikaṃ paccayaṃ vīmaṃsati pariggaṇhāti. Kaṅkhaṃ vitaratīti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) ādinayappavattaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ vicikicchaṃ atikkamati pajahati. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’nti (ma. ni. 1.347; 361; 3.86; a. ni. 4.181) ādinayappavattaṃ kalāpasammasanaṃ. Pubbabhāgeti paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhipariyāpannāya udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne. Obhāsādayoti obhāso ñāṇaṃ pīti passaddhi sukhaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upekkhā upaṭṭhānaṃ nikantīti ime obhāsādayo dasa. Udayaṃ pahāyāti udayabbayānupassanāya gahitaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ vissajjetvā tesaṃ bhaṅgasseva anupassanato bhaṅgānupassanaṃ ñāṇaṃ patvā ādīnavānupassanāpubbaṅgamāya nibbidānupassanāya nibbindanto. Muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante uppannagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ uppannena maggañāṇena sabbasaṅkhāresu virajjanto vimuccanto. Maggakkhaṇe hi ariyo virajjati vimuccatīti ca vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘yathākkamena cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā’’ti. Maggaphalanibbānapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhitabbassa pabhedena ekūnavīsatibhedassa. Arahato hi avasiṭṭhakilesābhāvena ekūnavīsatitā. Assāti ānāpānakammaṭṭhānikassa.
234 并没有单独的业处修习方法,因为依初四法组证得禅那后,即以受随观、心随观、法随观的方式教导。“他们”指三组四法组。显示巴利原文
234.Visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthi paṭhamacatukkavasena adhigatajhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena desitattā. Tesanti tiṇṇaṃ catukkānaṃ.
“遍知喜”指一遍又一遍、完全地感受喜为性,或彼一遍又一遍、完全地感受此喜,或正一遍又一遍、完全地感受彼喜。其中,仅以“感受”一词便足以表明对喜的恭敬了知,但为显示以何种方式而欲感受彼喜,故取“遍”字,谓“一遍又一遍地感受,故为遍知”。故说“以二种方式”等。显示巴利原文
Pītipaṭisaṃvedīti pītiyā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedanāsīlo, tassā vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedayamāno. Tattha kāmaṃ saṃvedana-ggahaṇeneva pītiyā sakkaccaṃ viditabhāvo bodhito hoti, yehi pana pakārehi tassā saṃvedanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘paṭi paṭi saṃvedīti paṭisaṃvedī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’tiādi.
其中,“如何从所缘而遍知喜”是问句。入于有喜的二禅:指次第入于有喜俱的初禅与第二禅。“彼”指由彼。因期待“遍知”一词,此属主格作作者义。于入定刹那:指在入定的刹那。以得禅那:指以具足禅那的状态。从所缘:指以所缘为门,属于彼所缘禅那的喜被遍知,因所缘已被遍知。此为何义?譬如寻蛇者,当蛇的住处被遍知时,蛇亦被遍知、被捕捉,因以咒术药力捕捉彼为易;同样,当作为喜之住处的所缘被遍知时,彼喜即依自相与共相被遍知,因捕捉彼为易。显示巴利原文
Tattha kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti pucchāvacanaṃ. Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjatīti pītisahagatāni dve paṭhamadutiyajhānāni paṭipāṭiyā samāpajjati. Tassāti tena. ‘‘Paṭisaṃviditā’’ti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā kattuatthe etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Samāpattikkhaṇeti samāpannakkhaṇe. Jhānapaṭilābhenāti jhānena samaṅgibhāvena. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇamukhena, tadārammaṇajhānapariyāpannā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā nāma sappapariyesanaṃ carantena tassa āsaye paṭisaṃvidite sopi paṭisaṃvidito gahito eva hoti mantāgadabalena tassa gahaṇassa sukarattā, evaṃ pītiyā āsayabhūte ārammaṇe paṭisaṃvidite sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā eva hoti salakkhaṇato, sāmaññato ca tassā gahaṇassa sukarattāti.
如何以不痴迷而觉知喜?应引来与前文连接理解。内观刹那:即以内观慧达到锐利、明净时,从其境上观察的刹那。以通达特相:即通过通达喜的自相与共相。因为,对于某一法,若其自相与共相已被了知,则该法即被如实了知。因此说“以不痴迷而觉知喜”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Vipassanākkhaṇeti vipassanāpaññāya tikkhavisadappattāya visayato dassanakkhaṇe. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti pītiyā salakkhaṇassa, sāmaññalakkhaṇassa ca paṭivijjhanena. Yaṃ hi yassa visesato, sāmaññato ca lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ vidite so yāthāvato vidito eva hoti. Tenāha ‘‘asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
现在,为了藉由巴利圣典本身来阐明其义,便说“曾这样说”等。其中,有关“以长入息”等应解说之义,前文已说。在那里,是以念与作意等角度显示而引据圣典;在此,则是以觉知喜的角度而引据,而觉知喜在义理上已作分析。此外,此处略义如下:“以长入息”——即依作为所缘的长入息而了知,彼喜由此被觉知,应如此连接。“了知心一境性、无散乱”——即了知属于禅那、名为“无散乱”的心一境性,以与之相应的慧而了知。正如喜通过所缘门被觉知,与之相应的诸法也通过所缘门被觉知。“念已现前”——即依于长入息,与禅那相应的念住安立于彼所缘;通过所缘门,也可说为安立于禅那。“以彼念”——以如是现前的彼念,以如前所述的彼智,由于所缘被善加觉知,依于彼所缘,彼喜便被觉知。对于“以长出息”等,也应以同样的理趣来了知义理。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha dīghaṃ assāsavasenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha pana satokāritādassanavasena pāḷi āgatā, idha pītipaṭisaṃveditāvasena, pītipaṭisaṃveditā ca atthato vibhattā eva. Apica ayamettha saṅkhepattho – dīghaṃ assāsavasenāti dīghassa assāsassa ārammaṇabhūtassa vasena pajānato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānatoti jhānapariyāpannaṃ ‘‘avikkhepo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ cittassekaggataṃ taṃsampayuttāya paññāya pajānato. Yatheva hi ārammaṇamukhena pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, evaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammāpi ārammaṇamukhena paṭisaṃviditā eva hontīti. Sati upaṭṭhitā hotīti dīghaṃ assāsavasena jhānasampayuttā sati tassa ārammaṇe upaṭṭhitā ārammaṇamukhena jhānepi upaṭṭhitā nāma hoti. Tāya satiyāti evaṃ upaṭṭhitāya tāya satiyā yathāvuttena tena ñāṇena suppaṭividitattā ārammaṇassa tassa vasena tadārammaṇā sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃ passāsavasenātiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
如是,为了从所缘与不痴迷两方面,分别阐明依第一组四法所显示的觉知喜,故说“转向者”等。其中,“转向者”指转向禅那者。“彼喜”指属于禅那的喜。“了知者”指在入定刹那,由所缘门而了知者。彼喜已为彼所觉知,应如此会通。“见者”指以见为体的智,即从禅那出起后而见者。“观察者”指观察禅那者。“决意心者”指决意禅那心:“我将于此时限内成为具禅那者”。如是,以五种自在,由了知禅那之门,从所缘方面显示了喜的觉知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamacatukkavasena dassitaṃ pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ārammaṇato, asammohato ca vibhāgaso dassetuṃ ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvajjatoti jhānaṃ āvajjantassa. Sā pītīti sā jhānapariyāpannā pīti. Jānatoti samāpannakkhaṇe ārammaṇamukhena jānato. Tassa sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Passatoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena jhānato vuṭṭhāya passantassa. Paccavekkhatoti jhānaṃ paccavekkhantassa. Cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahatoti ‘‘ettakaṃ velaṃ jhānasamaṅgī bhavissāmī’’ti jhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ vasībhāvānaṃ vasena jhānassa pajānanamukhena ārammaṇato pītiyā paṭisaṃvedanā dassitā.
现在,为了显示依信等成就禅那与内观之法——即属于禅那及属于内观道品的信等——而觉知喜,故说“以信胜解者”等。其中,“胜解者”指相信者,意取止与观。“策励精进者”等亦同此理。“应证知者”指应以殊胜慧了知者。“证知者”指以内观慧为先导的道慧而了知者。“应遍知者”指以审度遍知与道慧而遍知苦谛者。“应断者”指以断遍知与道慧而断集谛者。“修习者、作证者”指修习应修之道谛,作证应证之灭谛。然而,此处若有人仅就喜举出应证知等,则不合理,因为意在举出禅那等总集后,再从中简别出喜。显示巴利原文
Idāni yehi dhammehi jhānaṃ, vipassanā ca sijjhanti; tesaṃ jhānapariyāpannānaṃ, vipassanāmaggapariyāpannānañca saddhādīnaṃ vasena pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adhimuccatoti saddahantassa, samathavipassanāvasenāti adhippāyo. Vīriyaṃ paggaṇhatotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Abhiññeyyanti abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya jānitabbaṃ. Abhijānatoti vipassanāpaññāpubbaṅgamāya maggapaññāya jānato. Pariññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ tīraṇapariññāya, maggapaññāya ca parijānato. Pahātabbanti samudayasaccaṃ pahānapariññāya, maggapaññāya ca pajahato. Bhāvayato sacchikaroto bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ , sacchikātabbaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ. Keci panettha pītiyā eva vasena abhiññeyyādīni uddharanti, taṃ ayuttaṃ jhānādisamudāyaṃ uddharitvā tato pītiyā niddhāraṇassa adhippetattā.
于此,依“以长入息”等第一组四法,从所缘方面说明了觉知喜;同样,以“转向者”等五句也作了说明。而以“应证知者证知”等,则从不痴迷方面作了说明。以“以信胜解者”等,则从两方面作了说明。应知略说:依止则从所缘,依内观则从不痴迷,而说觉知喜。然而,为何在此受随观念处中,以喜为标题而说受,而非直接以受本身呢?这是为了依地差别等将受分门别类,显示四种受随观。再者,世尊在显示受业处时,因喜较为粗显,为令把握与喜相应之乐,故以喜为标题来显示。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘dīghaṃ assāsavasenā’’tiādinā paṭhamacatukkavasena ārammaṇato pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādīhi pañcahi padehi. ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhijānato’’tiādīhi pana asammohato. ‘‘Saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādīhi ubhayathāpīti saṅkhepato samathavasena ārammaṇato, vipassanāvasena asammohato pītipaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha vedanānupassanāyaṃ pītisīsena vedanā gahitā, na sarūpato evāti? Bhūmivibhāgādivasena vedanaṃ bhinditvā catudhā vedanānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ. Apica vedanākammaṭṭhānaṃ dassento bhagavā pītiyā oḷārikattā taṃsampayuttasukhaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pītisīsena dasseti.
依此理趣,其余诸句——‘觉知乐者’、‘觉知心行者’等句,应依觉知喜句中所说之理趣而了知其义。因为在喜句的位置代入乐等诸句,例如‘以二种行相觉知乐、觉知心行——从所缘上’等,即可了知‘入与乐俱行之三禅或四禅’等义,故说‘依三禅’等。所谓‘受等’,此‘等’字包含了想,故说‘二蕴’。为显示内观地——即依杂论诸行思惟而显示内观地,在止中由于无身乐,而说‘乐者,有二种乐’等。‘彼’即是以寂止同义语所说的灭。‘因此比丘先前未把握时’等,在《清净道论》中详述了身行,故应依所说理趣了知。在那里是依身行而说,在此是依心行而说,唯此差别。显示巴利原文
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānīti ‘‘sukhapaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī’’ti padāni pītipaṭisaṃvedipade āgatanayeneva atthato veditabbāni. Sakkā hi ‘‘dvīhākārehi sukhapaṭisaṃveditā hoti, cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃveditā hoti ārammaṇato’’tiādinā pītiṭṭhāne sukhādipadāni pakkhipitvā ‘‘sukhasahagatāni tīṇi jhānāni, cattāri vā jhānāni samāpajjatī’’tiādinā atthaṃ viññātuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Vedanādayoti ādi-saddena saññā gahitā. Tenāha ‘‘dve khandhā’’ti. Vipassanābhūmidassanatthanti pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārasammasanavasena vipassanāya bhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ samathe kāyikasukhābhāvato. Soti so passambhanapariyāyena vutto nirodho. ‘‘Imassa hi bhikkhuno pubbe apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.220) vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vutto, tasmā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tattha kāyasaṅkhāravasena āgato, idha cittasaṅkhāravasenāti ayameva viseso.
如此以引申的方式显示了心行的止息后,为显示此四法组中其余应说之义,而说‘复次’等。其中,‘喜句’指‘觉知喜者’等教导中的部分。以喜为举首而说受,意谓以喜的称谓来说与之相应的受,而非指喜本身,此为意旨。其理由如前已述。‘两个心行句’,指‘觉知心行’、‘止息心行’这两个与心行相关的文句。根据‘识缘名色’之说,由心所系缚的,称为心所系缚。正因如此,虽可说由心所造作的是心行,如想、受等,但此处唯以想和受为表征,故说‘与想相应的受’。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ cittasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ atidesena dassetvā yadaññaṃ imasmiṃ catukke vattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pītipadeti ‘‘pītipaṭisaṃvedī’’tiādinā desitakoṭṭhāse. Pītisīsena vedanā vuttāti pītiapadesena taṃsampayuttā vedanā vuttā, na pītīti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesūti ‘‘cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāra’’nti cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃyuttesu dvīsu padesu. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (mahāva. 1; ma. ni. 3.126; udā. 1) vacanato cittena paṭibaddhāti cittapaṭibaddhā. Tato eva kāmaṃ cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā, saññāvedanādayo, idha pana upalakkhaṇamattaṃ saññā vedanāva adhippetāti āha ‘‘saññāsampayuttā vedanā’’ti.
235 ‘觉知心者’:此处,对心的觉知有两种方式:从所缘与从不迷惑。如何是从所缘?通过证得四禅,于证入刹那依得禅等所说之理,一切皆可了知,故说‘应知依四禅而有觉知心者’。‘令心喜悦’:即令与禅相应之心,以相应的喜而喜悦;或者,以彼喜为所缘而生起的观照心,以彼作为所缘的喜而喜悦。‘令欢悦’等词,是其同义词,因为是喜的同义语。显示巴利原文
235. Cittapaṭisaṃvedīti ettha dvīhākārehi cittapaṭisaṃveditā hoti ārammaṇato, asammohato ca. Kathaṃ ārammaṇato? Cattāri jhānāni samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhenātiādinā vuttanayānusārena sabbaṃ suviññeyyanti āha ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃveditā veditabbā’’ti. Cittaṃ modentoti jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sampayuttāya pītiyā modayamāno, taṃ vā pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyā modayamāno. Pamodentotiādīni padāni tasseva vevacanāni pītipariyāyabhāvato.
“以相应的喜令心喜悦”:即以与禅心相应、具有庆悦相的喜觉支所成之禅喜,通过俱生等缘及禅缘,令彼禅心增盛,达到欢喜踊跃的状态,而喜悦、欢悦。“作为所缘”:即瑜伽行者以殊胜的与禅相应的喜为所缘,生起观照心,以此喜为所缘,令心达到欢喜踊跃的状态,称为喜悦、欢悦。显示巴利原文
Sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodetīti jhānacittasampayuttāya pītisambojjhaṅgabhūtāya odagyalakkhaṇāya jhānapītiyā tameva jhānacittaṃ sahajātādipaccayavasena ceva jhānapaccayavasena ca paribrūhento haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento āmodeti pamodeti ca. Ārammaṇaṃ katvāti uḷāraṃ jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyā yogāvacaro haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento ‘‘āmodeti pamodetī’’ti vuccati.
“平等安立”:即不落入丝毫的昏沉分与掉举分,不低垂、不高扬,如同诸根平等行道而不偏斜,或者因定力达到极致而获得不动,如此正确地安住,以安止力而安立。“以通达相”:即通过对无常等相的一再洞察,刹那刹那地觉了。“刹那心一境性”:即仅住刹那的定。彼定亦于所缘上无间断地以一味运行,不为敌对法所制伏,如同安止一般令心不动而住。因此说“如是生起”等。显示巴利原文
Samaṃ ṭhapentoti yathā īsakampi līnapakkhaṃ, uddhaccapakkhañca anupagamma anonataṃ anunnataṃ yathā indriyānaṃ samattapaṭipattiyā avisamaṃ, samādhissa vā ukkaṃsagamanena āneñjappattiyā sammadeva ṭhitaṃ hoti, evaṃ appanāvasena ṭhapento. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti aniccādikassa lakkhaṇassa paṭi paṭi vijjhanena khaṇe khaṇe avabodhena. Khaṇikacittekaggatāti khaṇamattaṭṭhitiko samādhi. Sopi hi ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ ekākārena pavattamāno paṭipakkhena anabhibhūto appito viya cittaṃ niccalaṃ ṭhapeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ uppannāyā’’tiādi.
“令解脱”:即通过镇伏解脱而令远离、分离,意即断除诸盖。“在观照的刹那”:即在坏灭随观的刹那。因为坏灭实为无常的极致,所以那位坏灭随观的瑜伽行者以心为主导,观一切诸行为无常,而非恒常。由于无常是苦,苦是无我,故他观苦,而非乐;观无我,而非我。然而,凡是无常、苦、无我的,不应欢喜;凡不应欢喜的,不应染着。因此,依坏灭随观而见诸行为无常、苦、无我时,便对彼厌离,而不欢喜;离欲,而不染着。他如此厌离、离欲时,便暂时以世间智令贪灭尽,而不令生起;即不令其生起之意。或者,如此离欲者,对于已见的诸行,也以自智令所未见者灭尽,而不令生起;即唯作意于灭,不作意于生起之意。他如此行道时,便舍离而不执取。此为何义?此无常等随观,与诸蕴行俱,因舍弃烦恼、因见有为过患而倾向于其相反的涅槃,故称为舍离舍和趣入舍。因此,具足彼观的瑜伽行者,依所说的方法,舍弃烦恼,趣入涅槃。故说:“彼于观照刹那,以无常随观从常想令心解脱、令离……以舍离随观从执取令心解脱、令离,而出息、入息。”显示巴利原文
Mocentoti vikkhambhanavimuttivasena vivecento visuṃ karonto, nīvaraṇāni pajahantoti attho. Vipassanākkhaṇeti bhaṅgānupassanākkhaṇe. Bhaṅgo hi nāma aniccatāya paramā koṭi, tasmā tāya bhaṅgānupassako yogāvacaro cittamukhena sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ aniccato passati, no niccato. Aniccassa dukkhattā, dukkhassa ca anattakattā tadeva dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato. Anattato anupassati, no attato. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ. Yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na taṃ rañjitabbaṃ. Tasmā bhaṅgadassanānusārena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti saṅkhāragate diṭṭhe tasmiṃ nibbindati, no nandati. Virajjati, no rajjati. So evaṃ nibbindanto virajjanto lokiyeneva tāva ñāṇena rāgaṃ nirodheti, no samudeti, nāssa samudayaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā so evaṃ viratto yathā diṭṭhaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ, tathā adiṭṭhaṃ attano ñāṇena nirodheti, no samudeti. Nirodhamevassa manasikaroti, no samudayanti attho. So evaṃ paṭipanno paṭinissajjati, no ādiyati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato, saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato pariccāgapaṭinissaggo pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo cāti vuccati. Tasmā tāya samannāgato yogāvacaro vuttanayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento…pe… paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati cā’’ti.
其中,观无常,或观“无常”,即是无常随观。此乃取三界诸法之无常性而生起的观智之名。“从常想”:即对于有为法生起“常、永恒”的邪想。应知以想为首,亦包括心与见。此法亦适用于乐想等。“以厌离随观”:即对诸行生起厌离的随观。“从欢喜”:即从伴有喜的渴爱。“以离欲随观”:即以如是离欲的随观,故说“令从贪解脱”。“以灭随观”:即观照诸行灭尽的随观。或观照诸行如是灭尽、未来不再以结生之因生起,此即灭随观,因其欲解脱已达强盛。故说“令从生起解脱”。以舍离的方式而生起的随观,是舍离随观。“从执取”:即从以常想等而执取,或从结生的执取。当知此处义理如此。显示巴利原文
Tattha aniccassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāya etaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññātoti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti pavattāya micchāsaññāya. Saññāsīsena cittadiṭṭhīnampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sukhasaññādīsupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbindanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nanditoti sappītikataṇhāto. Virāgānupassanāyāti tathā virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgato mocento’’ti. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena na uppajjanti, evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattā. Tenāha ‘‘samudayato mocento’’ti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Ādānatoti niccādivasena gahaṇato, paṭisandhiggahaṇato vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
236 第236:无常随观者,即观“无常”者,或具有观无常之习性者。此处应阐明四重分别:何为无常?如何是无常?何谓无常随观?谁是无常随观者?为明此义,乃说“无常应了知”等语。显示巴利原文
236. Aniccanti anupassī, aniccassa vā anupassanasīlo aniccānupassīti ettha kiṃ panetaṃ aniccaṃ, kathaṃ vā aniccaṃ, kā vā aniccānupassanā, kassa vā aniccānupassanāti catukkaṃ vibhāvetabbanti taṃ dassento ‘‘aniccaṃ veditabba’’ntiādimāha.
其中,所谓“常”,即是恒常、常住,如涅槃。“非常”即无常,具有生灭,就义理而言即是有为法。故说:“无常即五蕴。何以故?因为有生、灭、变异性故。”意即具有生、灭、变异性。其中,有为法由诸因缘生起,先前未有而后产生、获得自体,是为“生”。诸法既生已,其刹那灭坏、消亡,是为“灭”。因老而变异,是为“变异”。因为,正如于生位坏灭时,在灭位并无实体的坏灭;同样地,在名为住位而趋向灭位时,亦无实体的坏灭,唯于此安立“老”的名称。因此,单一法亦有老,此即称为“刹那老”。而且,必须承认在生位与灭位中实体并无坏灭,否则便有过失:“另一法生起,另一法坏灭”。为对治此刹那老,故说“变异”。至于此处未尽之义,将于后文详述。显示巴利原文
Tattha niccaṃ nāma dhuvaṃ sassataṃ yathā taṃ nibbānaṃ, na niccanti aniccaṃ, udayabbayavantaṃ, atthato saṅkhatā dhammāti āha ‘‘aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā’’ti, uppādavayaññathattasabbhāvāti attho. Tattha saṅkhatadhammānaṃ hetupaccayehi uppajjanaṃ ahutvā sambhavo attalābho uppādo. Uppannānaṃ tesaṃ khaṇanirodho vināso vayo. Jarāya aññathābhāvo aññathattaṃ. Yathā hi uppādāvatthāya bhinnāya bhaṅgāvatthāyaṃ vatthubhedo natthi, evaṃ ṭhitisaṅkhātāya bhaṅgābhimukhāvatthāyampi vatthubhedo natthi, yattha jarāvohāro. Tasmā ekassāpi dhammassa jarā yujjati, yā khaṇikajarāti vuccati. Ekaṃsena ca uppādabhaṅgāvatthāsu vatthuno abhedo icchitabbo, aññathā ‘‘añño uppajjati, añño bhijjatī’’ti āpajjeyya . Tayimaṃ khaṇikajaraṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aññathatta’’nti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato kathayissāma.
由于具有这三相,诸蕴获得“无常”之名;在这三相中,便施设了“无常性”之名。因此,在说明“无常性即它们之生、灭、变异”之后,为特别显示依诸法的刹那灭而施设无常性之名,故说“或成为已存在而后不存在”等语。其中,因为不存在以生起为先,所以用“成为已存在”来表示,借以显示以显现为先的坏灭性质。即以如是的方式——以生起的方式。以刹那坏灭,即刹那灭。对此无常性,即对称为刹那坏灭的无常性,以此观——即如前所述的无常随观。具足此观者,便是那位具足的瑜伽行者。显示巴利原文
Yassa lakkhaṇattayassa bhāvā khandhesu aniccasamaññā, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇattaye aniccatāsamaññāti ‘‘aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathatta’’nti vatvā visesato dhammānaṃ khaṇikanirodhe aniccatāvohāroti dassento ‘‘hutvā abhāvo vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppādapubbakattā abhāvassa hutvāgahaṇaṃ. Tena pākabhāvapubbakattaṃ vināsabhāvassa dasseti. Tenevākārenāti nibbattanākāreneva. Khaṇabhaṅgenāti khaṇikanirodhena. Tassā aniccatāyāti khaṇikabhaṅgasaṅkhātāya aniccatāya. Tāya anupassanāyāti yathāvuttāya aniccānupassanāya. Samannāgatoti samaṅgibhūto yogāvacaro.
“灭尽”指诸行的坏灭、消亡;“离欲”指它们的离散、消解;“灭尽”即是“离欲”,因此称为“灭尽离欲”,也就是刹那灭。在这里,当证得此(涅槃)时,诸行彻底离散、寂灭,因此称为“究竟离欲”,也就是涅槃。所以这样说:“灭尽离欲是诸行的刹那坏灭,究竟离欲是涅槃。”依此二者而转起的,应这样理解:依灭尽离欲观而转起的是观智,依究竟离欲观而转起的是圣道。或者,观智依灭尽离欲观而转起,是就所缘而言;依究竟离欲观而转起,是就其趋向而言。而圣道依灭尽离欲观而转起,是就无迷惑而言;依究竟离欲观而转起,是就所缘而言。应当这样了知。“此即同理”一句,是指依照“离欲观者”句中所说的道理,类推“二种灭:灭尽灭与究竟灭”等义释,故应将“灭”字置于“离欲”处,依据这里所说的“诸行的坏灭”等道理来了解其义释。显示巴利原文
Khayo saṅkhārānaṃ vināso, virajjanaṃ tesaṃyeva vilujjanaṃ virāgo, khayo eva virāgo khayavirāgo, khaṇikanirodho. Accantamettha etasmiṃ adhigate saṅkhārā virajjanti nirujjhantīti accantavirāgo, nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khayavirāgo saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo, accantavirāgo nibbāna’’nti. Tadubhayavasena pavattāti khayavirāgānupassanāvasena vipassanāya, accantavirāgānupassanāvasena maggassa pavatti yojetabbā. Ārammaṇato vā vipassanāya khayavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti, tanninnabhāvato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena, maggassa pana asammohato khayavirāgānupassanāvasena, ārammaṇato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti veditabbā. ‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā yasmā virāgānupassī-pade vuttanayānusārena ‘‘dve nirodhā khayanirodho ca accantanirodho cā’’ti evamādiatthavaṇṇanaṃ atidisati, tasmā virāgaṭṭhāne nirodhapadaṃ pakkhipitvā ‘‘khayo saṅkhārānaṃ vināso’’tiādinā idha vuttanayena tassa atthavaṇṇanā veditabbā.
“舍遣”是指,以彼分断或正断的方式,对应当断除的法予以舍弃、弃除,这称为弃舍之舍遣。同样,在作为一切依着之舍遣状态的无为涅槃中,将自己投入其中,或者由于心倾向于它,或者以它为所缘而跃入其中,这称为投入之舍遣。显示巴利原文
Paṭinissajjanaṃ pahātabbassa tadaṅgavasena vā samucchedavasena vā pariccajanaṃ pariccāgapaṭinissaggo. Tathā sabbūpadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggabhūte visaṅkhāre attano nissajjanaṃ, tanninnatāya vā tadārammaṇatāya vā tattha pakkhandanaṃ pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo.
“以彼分断的方式”者:此处,无常随观先以彼分断的方式舍弃常想;在舍弃时,通过令其不转起,也舍弃了那些由执取“常”而生起的烦恼、以彼为根的诸行,以及以烦恼与诸行二者为根在未来当生的果报蕴——即通过令这一切不转起而舍弃。对苦想等也是如此。因此说“观智以彼分断的方式,连同诸蕴与诸行一起舍弃烦恼”。显示巴利原文
Tadaṅgavasenāti ettha aniccānupassanā tāva tadaṅgappahānavasena niccasaññaṃ pariccajati, pariccajantī ca tathā appavattiyaṃ ye ‘‘nicca’’nti gahaṇavasena kilesā, tammūlakā abhisaṅkhārā, tadubhayamūlakā ca vipākakkhandhā anāgate uppajjeyyuṃ, te sabbepi appavattikaraṇavasena pariccajati, tathā dukkhasaññādayo. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatī’’ti.
“以见有为过患故”:即通过见到三地诸行中的无常等过患。于其相反者,即以常等状态存在。由于趋向彼,即由于信解彼。“投入”即进入,如同正在进入。连同诸蕴与诸行一起舍弃烦恼:当烦恼被圣道舍弃时,通过使诸行成为无果报之法,以及使以彼为根的诸蕴不再生起,故说他们一切都被舍弃;因此说“圣道舍弃一切”。“二者”指观智与道智。道智也因在种姓智之后见涅槃,故称为“观”。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhatadosadassanenāti saṅkhate tebhūmake saṅkhāragate aniccatādidosadassanena. Niccādibhāvena tabbiparīte. Tanninnatāyāti tadadhimuttatāya. Pakkhandatīti anupavisati anupavisantaṃ viya hoti. Saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatīti maggena kilesesu pariccattesu avipākadhammatāpādanena abhisaṅkhārā, tammūlakā ca khandhā anuppattirahabhāvena pariccattā nāma hontīti sabbepi te maggo pariccajatīti vuttaṃ. Ubhayanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, maggañāṇañca. Maggañāṇampi hi gotrabhuñāṇassa anu pacchā nibbānadassanato ‘‘anupassanā’’ti vuccati.
“以十六事”者:即依十六种事而说,以及依寂静状态等而说——“ca”字是合集义。应引出“入出息念已修习”一句来连接。显示巴利原文
Soḷasavatthuvasena cāti soḷasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ vasenāpi vuccamānasantabhāvādivasenāpīti samuccayattho ca-saddo. ‘‘Ānāpānassati bhāvitā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
237 “此”指入出息念定。应知,也因能断除欲寻等寻思之力,故有大功德——应作如是连接。“此”即入出息念定。心于种种所缘中辗转奔驰,便是到处飘荡。显示巴利原文
237.Assāti ānāpānassatisamādhissa. Kāmavitakkādivitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi mahānisaṃsatā veditabbāti sambandho. Ayanti ānāpānassatisamādhi. Uccāvacesu ārammaṇesu pavattiyeva ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ.
“明”即是道,“解脱”是果。“根本性”指作为观(毗婆舍那)近行定的状态。圆满四念处:由于依身随观等四种随观而修习入出息念,故四念处得以转起。圆满七觉支:因为若未圆满四念处修习,便无觉支修习。圆满明与解脱:因为由觉支修习而达至顶点。“最后者”即最终者。显示巴利原文
Vijjā nāma maggo. Vimutti phalaṃ. Mūlabhāvo vipassanāya pādakabhāvo. Cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti kāyānupassanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena tassā bhāvanāya pavattanato. Satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya vinā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāpāripūriyā abhāvato. Vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrenti bojjhaṅgabhāvanāya tāsaṃ sikhāppattibhāvato. Carimakānanti antimakānaṃ.
238 “以灭尽之力”即依止息之力。“有之最后”:依有(生命)而言的最后,即低劣生命流转的最后。同样地,应知“禅那之最后”。“死亡之最后”:指死亡时的最后,即于死亡刹那生起、一切中的最末。“因此”:指于三有中的低劣欲有中生起。“它们”指入出息。“之前”指下方。由于《分别论注释》中阐明色法具足十六心识刹那的寿命,故说“与第十六心识一同生起”。或者,若取“死亡心之前”,以死亡心为界限,取其前,则说“与第十六心识一同生起”;依此取义时,入出息即被说为具足十七心识刹那的寿命。显示巴利原文
238.Nirodhavasenāti nirujjhanavasena. Bhavacarimakāti bhavavasena carimakā nihīnabhavapavattino. Tathā jhānacarimakā veditabbā. Cuticarimakāti cutiyā carimakā cutikkhaṇapavattino sabbapariyosānakā. Tasmāti tīsu bhavesu nihīne kāmabhave pavattanato. Teti assāsapassāsā. Puratoti heṭṭhā. Yasmā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 26 pakiṇṇakakathā) rūpadhammānaṃ soḷasacittakkhaṇāyukatā vibhāvitā, tasmā ‘‘soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Cuticittassa puratoti vā cuticittaṃ avadhibhāvena gahetvā tato oraṃ soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvāti evaṃ pana atthe gayhamāne sattarasacittakkhaṇāyukatāva assāsapassāsānaṃ vuttā hoti.
据说,对于修习此业处的比丘,这些会变得清晰,由此引出关联。此处说明了原因:'因为善巧地把握了入出息所缘'。为阐明此义,而说'死亡心'等。显示巴利原文
Ime kira imaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuttassa bhikkhuno pākaṭā hontīti ānetvā sambandho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā’’ti. Tamevatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘cuticittassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,'寿量之间'即指生命期间、生命刹那的界限。'法性如是'意为依于自性,也就是依于意愿。显示巴利原文
Tattha āyuantaraṃ nāma jīvitantaraṃ jīvanakkhaṇāvadhi. Dhammatāya evāti sabhāveneva, rucivasenevāti attho.
'观察月光后':即于白半月的黄昏时分,见到天空犹如四处倾泻的乳流,大地则如铺了银板般的沙地,心想:'此时真是宜人,此处也正合我意,这苦担还要背负多久呢?'思量自己的寿行之后,令其灭尽,这是此处所说之义。'划线后':指在经行处横向划线之后。显示巴利原文
Candālokaṃ oloketvāti juṇhapakkhe padosavelāyaṃ samantato āsiñcamānakhīradhāraṃ viya gaganatalaṃ, rajatapattasadisavālikāsanthatañca bhūmibhāgaṃ disvā ‘‘ramaṇīyo vatāyaṃ kālo, deso ca mama ajjhāsayasadiso, kīva ciraṃ nu kho ayaṃ dukkhabhāro vahitabbo’’ti attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā parikkhīṇeti adhippāyo. Lekhaṃ katvāti caṅkame tiriyaṃ lekhaṃ katvā.
“应修习”:即应修习,意为应当修持。显示巴利原文
Anuyuñjethāti anuyuñjeyya, bhāveyyāti attho.
寂止随念论注释显示巴利原文
Upasamānussatikathāvaṇṇanā
239 “如是”:即如前所述,依忆念离欲等功德的方式。“称为一切苦寂灭的”:即一切苦——苦苦等种种之苦——在此寂灭,故说为一切苦寂灭。显示巴利原文
239.Evanti yathāvuttena virāgādiguṇānussaraṇappakārena. Sabbadukkhūpasamasaṅkhātassāti dukkhadukkhādibhedaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ upasammati etthāti sabbadukkhūpasamoti saṅkhātabbassa.
在“施设法”等语中,即使是并无自性者,也由智所持、所认定,故称之为法;由此转而言“法即自性”。存在——即胜义上的存在性——名为“有”;与有俱者,即是“自性”,意为可证得、胜义上可得之色等。他们因持其自性,故称为法;依前述义,亦称自性。“和合”:以缘的和合为特相而聚集。“集会”是它的同义词。“由缘”:即由适当的缘。“所作”:即被造作。“非所作”:即不由任何缘造作。“无为”:其复数形式的原因前文已说。“被称为最上”:即被宣说为最上,ma是连音。那具有无为特相的自性法,应知即是离欲——即于此离染污法。以涅槃为所缘而生起的圣道所应断的慢、骄等,到达彼时即被断除,因此说“依彼……灭尽”。其中,依“我是优胜者”等思惟而转起的慢,即是慢骄。依男性而生的骄,为男性骄。以“等”字兼摄生骄等。“无骄”:即离骄的状态,为显示此义而说“无骄”。骄于此被粉碎,达到无骄的灭尽,故为粉碎骄。其余诸词,亦同此理。“欲渴”:即对诸欲的希求,即欲爱。诸欲之功德,有情于此执著,故为欲功德窟。三地轮转,即于三地之中的业、烦恼、异熟。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paññattidhammā’’tiādīsu asabhāvopi ñāṇena dhārīyati avadhārīyatīti dhammoti vuccatīti tato nivattento ‘‘dhammāti sabhāvā’’ti āha . Bhavanaṃ paramatthato vijjamānatā bhāvo, saha bhāvenāti sabhāvā, sacchikaṭṭhaparamatthato labbhamānarūpāti attho. Te hi attano sabhāvassa dhāraṇato dhammāti, yathāvuttenaṭṭhena sabhāvāti ca vuccanti. Saṅgammāti paccayasamodhānalakkhaṇena saṅgamena sannipatitvā. Samāgammāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Paccayehīti anurūpehi paccayehi. Katāti nibbattitā. Akatāti kehicipi paccayehi na katā. Asaṅkhatāti bahuvacanassa kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Aggamakkhāyatīti aggo akkhāyati, ma-kāro padasandhikaro. So asaṅkhatalakkhaṇo sabhāvadhammo virāgoti paccetabbo, virajjati ettha saṃkilesadhammoti. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānena ariyamaggena pahīyamānā mānamadādayo taṃ patvā pahīyanti nāmāti āha ‘‘tamāgamma…pe… vinassantī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1121; saṃ. ni. 4.108) maññanāvasena pavatto māno eva mānamado. Purisabhāvaṃ nissāya uppajjanakamado purisamado. Ādi-saddena jātimadādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Nimmadāti vigatamadabhāvā. Imameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘amadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Madā nimmadīyanti ettha amadabhāvaṃ vināsaṃ gacchantīti madanimmadano. Eseva nayo sesapadesupi. Kāmapipāsāti kāmānaṃ pātukamyatā, kāmataṇhā. Kāmaguṇā eva āliyanti ettha sattāti kāmaguṇālayā. Tebhūmakaṃ vaṭṭanti tīsu bhūmīsu kammakilesavipākavaṭṭaṃ. Esa asaṅkhatadhammo. Aparāparabhāvāyāti aparāparaṃ yoniādito yoniādibhāvāya. Ābandhanaṃ gaṇṭhikaraṇaṃ. Saṃsibbanaṃ tunnakāraṇaṃ. Nikkhamanaṃ, nissaraṇañcassa taṇhāya visaṃyogo evāti āha ‘‘visaṃyutto’’ti.
那些依功德为相、在涅槃中惯用的“粉碎骄慢”等名称,是取上述粉碎骄慢等涅槃功德而说“依粉碎骄慢等功德之力”,并非依“骄慢由此被粉碎”等方式。因为那些是圣道功德。世尊宣说了寂止功德,与此相应连接。是在哪里宣说的?在《无为相应》等(《相应部》4.366等)中。其中,“谛”即不虚妄。涅槃无论如何都不是非有,唯是真实,以不颠倒义而为谛。所以说:“谛唯一,无第二”(《经集》890)。“彼岸”即轮回的对岸。所以说:“已渡、到达彼岸、立于陆地之婆罗门”(《如是语》69),“人中少有人能到达彼岸”(《法句经》85)。“极难见”:因为自性极为深邃、极微细寂静,未积集资粮的智慧者不能得见,故极难见。于此无老,或者证得此者无老,故为不老。由此,以不被老等所坏、具坚固义为恒常。无渴爱等戏论,故无戏论。于此无死,故为不死。无诸不祥的染污之法,故为吉祥。不为四轭所逼迫,故为安稳。以无行作故为稀有,前所未有故为未曾有。无一切灾祸、无不利,故为无灾。无苦故为无恼。从一切染污垢中极为清净,特别清净,故为清净。不被四瀑流所淹没,故为洲。以从整个轮回苦中救护之义,为救护。显示巴利原文
Ye guṇe nimittaṃ katvā madanimmadanādināmāni nibbāne niruḷhāni, te madanimmadanatādike yathāvutte nibbattitanibbānaguṇe eva gahetvā āha ‘‘madanimmadanatādīnaṃ guṇānaṃ vasenā’’ti, na pana madā nimmadīyanti etenāti evamādike. Te hi ariyamaggaguṇā . Bhagavatā upasamaguṇā vuttāti sambandho. Kattha pana vuttāti? Asaṅkhatasaṃyuttādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.366 ādayo). Tattha saccanti avitathaṃ. Nibbānaṃ hi kenaci pariyāyena asantabhāvābhāvato ekaṃseneva santattā aviparītaṭṭhena saccaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekaṃ hi saccaṃ, na dutiyamatthī’’ti (su. ni. 890). Pāranti saṃsārassa paratīrabhūtaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti (itivu. 69), ‘‘appakā te manussesu, ye janā pāragāmino’’ti (dha. pa. 85) ca. Sududdasanti paramagambhīratāya, atisukhumasantasabhāvatāya ca anupacitañāṇasambhārehi daṭṭhuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya suṭṭhu duddasaṃ. Natthi ettha jarā, etasmiṃ vā adhigate puggalassa jarābhāvoti ajaraṃ. Tato eva jarādīhi apalokiyatāya thiraṭṭhena dhuvaṃ. Taṇhādipapañcābhāvato nippapañcaṃ. Natthi ettha matanti amataṃ. Asivabhāvakarānaṃ saṃkilesadhammānaṃ abhāvena sivaṃ. Catūhi yogehi anupaddutattā khemaṃ. Visaṅkhārabhāvena acchariyatāya, abhūtapubbatāya ca abbhutaṃ. Sabbāsaṃ ītīnaṃ anatthānaṃ abhāvena anītikaṃ. Niddukkhatāya abyābajjhaṃ. Sabbasaṃkilesamalato accantasuddhiyā visesato suddhīti visuddhi. Catūhipi oghehi anajjhottharaṇīyatāya dīpaṃ. Sakalavaṭṭadukkhato paripālanaṭṭhena tāṇaṃ.
“诸比丘,我将为你们开示真实”等开头的经文应理解为简略。通过“开头”一词,总括了此处未说,但由“无边际、无漏、微细、不老、不可见、无示现、殊胜、稀有、无灾法、解脱、庇护、归宿、甚深”等词语所明示的功德。其中,没有此法的生起或灭去,故为“无边际”,即是无为法。由于不是诸漏的所缘,故为“无漏”。因为是微细智慧所行的境界,故为“微细”。不像有为法那样被老所侵,故为“不老”。不被病等所坏,故为“不可见”。非眼识所能了知,故为“无示现”。以不令人满足之义,故为“殊胜”。以不常有,故为“稀有”。因具足不被灾患所征服的自性,且是无灾之因,故为“无灾法”。因为是轮回苦解脱之因,故为“解脱”。对于见轮回为怖畏者,是可藏身之处,故为“庇护”。正是他们的最上归趣,故为“归宿”。以普通智慧无法安立,有不可测度之义,故为“甚深”。即使是有福德之人,也难解难证,故为“难悟”。除了亲证之外,不能以思辨智所行,故为“非思议行境”。唯佛等智者所能了知、所能证得,故为“智者所证知”。应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saccañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādikā pāḷi saṃkhittāti veditabbā. Ādi-saddena anantaanāsavanipuṇaajajjaraapalokitaanidassanapaṇītaacchariyaanītikadhammamuttileṇaparāyaṇagambhīrādivacanehi ca bodhitā idha avuttā guṇā saṅgayhanti, tattha natthi etassa uppādanto vā vayanto vāti ananto, asaṅkhatadhammo. Āsavānaṃ anārammaṇatāya anāsavo. Nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya nipuṇo. Saṅkhatadhammo viya jarāya ajajjaritatāya ajajjaro. Byādhiādīhi apalokiyatāya apalokitaṃ. Acakkhuviññāṇaviññeyyatāya anidassano. Atittikaraṭṭhena paṇīto. Apacuratāya acchariyo. Ītīhi anabhibhavanīyasabhāvattā, anītikabhāvahetuto ca anītikadhammo. Vaṭṭadukkhamuttinimittatāya mutti. Saṃsāraṃ bhayato passantehi nilīyanīyato leṇaṃ. Tesaṃyeva parā gatīti parāyaṇo. Pakatiñāṇena aladdhapatiṭṭhatāya agādhaṭṭhena gambhīro. Katapuññehipi dukkhena kicchena anubujjhitabbato duranubodho. Sacchikiriyaṃ muñcitvā na takkañāṇena avacaritabboti atakkāvacaro. Buddhādīhi paṇḍiteheva veditabbato adhigantabbato paṇḍitavedanīyoti evamattho veditabbo.
唯圣弟子能成就,因为通过作证现观,涅槃的功德得以显现。此处的“唯”字用于非处,应连接为“唯成就”。或者,依“乐成就”之义,而说“唯圣弟子”。因此,才说“虽然如此”等。以寂止为重者,即倾向于涅槃者。应如理作意前述的寂止功德。“安乐睡眠”等将在慈心论中阐明。由于心倾向于涅槃,故为殊胜信解者。显示巴利原文
Ariyasāvakassevaijjhati sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānaguṇānaṃ pākaṭabhāvato. Aṭṭhāne cāyaṃ eva-saddo vutto, ijjhati evāti yojanā. Sukhasiddhivasena vā evaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ariyasāvakassevā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi. Upasamagarukenāti nibbānaninnena. Manasi kātabbā yathāvuttā upasamaguṇā. Sukhaṃ supatītiādīsu vattabbaṃ mettākathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati. Paṇītādhimuttiko hoti nibbānādhimuttattā.